JP2023077821A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine PY1 includes a game control microcomputer 101 capable of executing a big winning game when it is determined as a big winning by determining whether or not a big winning based on the entry of game balls in a first start port 11 or a second start port 12 to be won is achieved, a board lamp 54, and a performance control microcomputer 121 capable of executing a board lamp light-emitting performance in which the board lamp 54 emits light. The performance control microcomputer 121 can execute a joint fighting ready-to-win for suggesting the possibility that the big winning is executed. The board lamp light-emitting performance includes a first board lamp light-emitting performance and a second board lamp light-emitting performance suggesting that a big winning game is more likely to be executed than in the first board lamp light-emitting performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In a conventional pachinko game machine, on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole, a hit determination is performed to determine whether or not a hit has occurred. A gaming machine that executes a winning game is known.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko game machine, like the game machine described in Patent Document 1 below, the board lamp (light emitting part) is made to emit light according to the contents of the variable production based on the result of the hit determination, and the production is performed. It is known to raise.

JP 2012-105833 A

However, in recent years, there are many game machines capable of emitting light from the light emitting unit as described in Patent Document 1, so simply making the light emitting unit emit light may lack interest. There was room for

The gaming machine of the present invention is
A game control means capable of executing a special game based on the establishment of a specific condition;
a light-emitting part capable of emitting light;
A production control means capable of executing a light emission production that causes the light emitting unit to emit light,
The production control means is
making it possible to execute a special effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed;
The light emitting effect includes a first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect suggesting that the special game is more likely to be executed than the first light emitting effect.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view which shows a 2nd big prize-winning apparatus etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in a standby state, and (B) is the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in operation. It is a front view. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side; FIG. (A) is a table showing general-purpose random numbers, and (B) is a table showing special-related random numbers. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a ready-to-win determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a prefetch determination table. It is a jackpot game control table. It is explanatory drawing of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production|presentation mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the SP reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending|holding production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of movable body production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of operation effects; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; It is a jackpot game control table of the first embodiment. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of the non-time saving state of the first embodiment. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table of the time saving state of the first embodiment. (A) In the non-time-saving state of the first embodiment, a table showing the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of the jackpot and the jackpot pattern X, (B) In the non-time-saving state of the first embodiment, A table showing the allocation rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of the jackpot and the jackpot pattern Y, (C) the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of non-time saving state and reach loss in the first embodiment Table showing the distribution rate of (D) is a table showing the distribution rate of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selected in the case of non-time saving state and reach no loss of the first embodiment. (A) A table showing the allocation rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern selected in the case of the time saving state and jackpot of the first embodiment, (B) Selected in the case of the time saving state and reach loss of the first embodiment It is a table showing the distribution rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern, (C) the table showing the distribution rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern selected in the case of the time saving state and reach no loss of the first embodiment. It is the 1st look-ahead determination table of the non-time saving state of a 1st embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the light emission of the left and right hammer lamps of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the light emission of the right and left hammer lamps of the first embodiment. It is a table showing the execution probability of the first board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment. It is a table showing the execution probability of the second board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the 1st board lamp light emission production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the second board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 1st board lamp light emission production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 2nd board lamp light emission production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation|movement of the on-board movable body in the 1st on-board movable body production|presentation. (A) An explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the movable body presentation on the first board in the failure mode, (B) An explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the movable body presentation on the first board in the success mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an advanced challenge effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an advanced challenge effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an advanced challenge effect of the first embodiment; It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the battle reach of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of joint struggle reach of the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the story reach of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation|movement of the on-board movable body in the 2nd on-board movable body production|presentation. (A) An explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the second board movable body presentation in the failure mode, (B) An explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the second board movable body presentation in the success mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the on-board movable body challenge production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the on-board movable body challenge production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the on-board movable body challenge production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing according to the first embodiment; It is a flow chart of processing at the time of starting winning of the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the side of a main control board according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side according to the second embodiment; It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view which shows a 7 segment display. It is a figure which shows an excessive prize ball prevention function. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number. (A) It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in case of over-prize-ball abnormality, (B) It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in case of magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize ball notice image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop notice image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state. (A) It is a figure which shows when a special reset switch is pressed down, (B) It is a figure which shows when a customer waiting state has passed for 1 hour. 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment; It is a flow chart of input processing. It is a flow chart of difference ball number measurement processing. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. 6 is a flowchart of output processing; 9 is a flowchart of outer-end signal output processing; It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reset of the number of difference balls in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference ball number is displayed with a 7 segment display in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. They are a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type determination table, a losing symbol type determination table, and a reach determination table according to the third embodiment. It is a determination table of the big hit design type and the small hit design type according to the third embodiment, and is a table for explaining the types of the big hit and the small hit. FIG. 10 is a determination table for the type of lost symbols according to the third embodiment, and is a table for explaining types of lost symbols. FIG. It is a table|surface which shows the kind of the hit determination table which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the open pattern table of an electric chew. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table according to the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart of game state management processing according to the third embodiment; It is a figure explaining the outline of the game flow of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure etc. which show the display screen of each production mode which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the RUSH rush production|presentation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In this specification, for simplification of description, by describing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, or a member, the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. corresponding to the symbol or code is omitted or may be abbreviated. Further, in any flow chart described later, a plurality of processes in a plurality of arbitrary steps can be arbitrarily changed in execution order or executed in parallel as long as there is no contradiction in the processing contents.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is the first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left, right, up and down directions for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (as seen from the front). In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the pachinko gaming machine PY1. and

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The game machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 22.例文帳に追加Further, the front door 23 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU, which will be described later, is mounted, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via hinges 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board attachment frame 2A faces the transparent plate 23t. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. It is sufficient if the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY1.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball for firing the game ball (the amount that the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k. A lower decorative body 36 projecting greatly forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper plate 34 is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. A lower tray 35 is provided in the center of the lower part of the front face of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34 .

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as “normal button”) 40 is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a grip portion, or the like. Further, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32 formed so as to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 (operating means) is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a grip portion, or the like.

A speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 formed so as to protrude forward from the upper surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 consists of a left speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a right speaker 52R arranged on the right side. Frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 on the front side of the lower decorative body 36 . Further, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached as a performance device for increasing the interest in the game on the upper side of the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m. The frame movable device 58 is composed of a left frame movable device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame movable device 58R arranged on the right side.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5. FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall portion 1B for defining a game area 6 in which game balls can flow down is formed so as to protrude forward. A substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the game area 6 is also formed outside the inner wall portion 1B so as to protrude forward.

A game area 6 surrounded by an inner wall portion 1B, an outer wall portion 1C, and the like is formed on the front surface of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall portion 1B and the outer wall portion 1C.

The game area 6 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that the game area 6 is provided with a large number of game pegs (not shown). The game nail is a game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 through a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first big winning opening 14, In addition, a route is configured to moderately guide the player to the second prize-winning port 15 or the like.

In the game area 6, there is a first start winning device 11D formed with a first start opening 11 into which a game ball can enter, and a second start winning device 11D that enables or disables entry into the second start opening 12. A device (a so-called “electric chew”) 12D is provided.

The first start winning device 11D is stationary. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball enters. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 is the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1") (acquisition and determination of special figure 1 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 1 lottery" ) and the variable display of special figure 1. Also, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D has an actuatable electric chew opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position where entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12 is impossible or extremely difficult. Then, when the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the “open state” of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the fact that the electric tube opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D. In addition, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also called "the electric tube 12D opens", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is called "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

The winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2") (acquisition and determination of special figure 2 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 2 lottery" ) and the variable display of special figure 2. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a general prize winning opening 10 into which game balls can enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. Passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") lottery (that is, normal pattern random number acquisition and determination: hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery") and the variable display of the normal pattern. It's becoming The power chew 12D is released by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game accompanied by the opening of the electric chew 12D.

Also, the game area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT 14D") having a first big winning hole 14 into which a game ball can enter.

The first big prize winning device 14D has a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can be operated in an open state and a closed state. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is operated to open/close the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加Normally, the AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state to block the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加In this way, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14 only when the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the first big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g that guides the game ball to the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. In addition, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guidance stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a second big winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") having a second big winning opening 15 into which a game ball can enter. The second big winning device 15D has an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second big winning hole 15, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加The VAT opening/closing member 15k can be in an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in an open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second big winning opening 15 is also called "closed state". In this manner, the second big winning opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When game balls enter the second big winning hole 15, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the second big winning device 15D will be described in detail. Inside the second big winning device 15D, a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a capable of detecting a game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 and allowing the game ball to pass downward is provided. It is

A specific area 16 through which a game ball can pass (enter) and a non-specific area 17 are provided in the downstream area of the second big winning hole sensor 15a. A game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole sensor 15a is sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The distribution device 16D includes a distribution member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving a distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k in the front view of FIG. 3A) that prevents passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 is positioned slightly to the right of the left end of the specific region 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific region 16 directly above it). When the sorting member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is difficult and passes through the non-specific area 17 . The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning hole 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: swinging in the front view of FIG. The left end of the dividing member 16k is positioned slightly to the left of the right end of the specific region 16, the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific region 16 directly above it, and the specific region 16 is open directly above it). When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning port 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Only in a predetermined round game (for example, 10R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can be changed to the second state.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect game balls passing through (entering) the respective areas 16 and 17 and pass the game balls downward. .

Only one of the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D can be provided as long as the game is not hindered.

Also, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging the game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Further, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 (light emitting section) capable of emitting light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area (first game area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area (second game area) on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area is called "right hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, a flow path through which a game ball can flow down when a game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and a game ball flows down when a game ball is shot right-handed. A possible flow path is referred to as the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of game nails and the like.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right, thereby passing the gate 13, the second starting port 12, the first big winning port 14, or the second It is possible to aim to win a prize to the big prize opening 15.例文帳に追加

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, first big winning opening 14, and second big winning opening 15) It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

Also, the board lamp 54 that can emit light provided on the game board 1 will be described. On the game board 1, as board lamps 54, a first left beating board lamp 54a (second light emitting part, first light emitting part), a second left beating board lamp 54b, a third left beating board lamp 54c, A left and right punching platen lamp 54d, a first right punching platen lamp 54e, a second right punching platen lamp 54f, a third right punching platen lamp 54g, a fourth right punching platen lamp 54h, and a fifth right punching platen lamp 54i. , a sixth right beating table lamp 54j (third light emitting section, second light emitting section), and a seventh right beating table lamp 54k (first light emitting section). As shown in FIG. 2, a first left beating ramp 54a, a second left beating ramp 54b, a third left beating ramp 54c, a left and right beating ramp 54d, a first right beating ramp 54e, A second right-handing ramp 54f, a third right-handing ramp 54g, a fourth right-handing ramp 54h, a fifth right-handing ramp 54i, a sixth right-handing ramp 54j, and a seventh right-handing ramp. The lamp 54k is provided around the display section 50a.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the first flow path R1, there are a first left hammering ramp 54a, a second left hammering ramp 54b, a third left hammering ramp 54c, and a left and right hammering ramp 54d. is provided. The first left beating lamp 54a, the second left beating lamp 54b, the third left beating lamp 54c, and the left and right beating lamp 54d are all made to emit light, so that the player can make left-handed beating. It can be shown that it is possible to proceed with the game without taking profit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a first right hitting board ramp 54e is provided in the game area above the center of the game area 6 in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, on the second flow path R2, there are a second right-handing ramp 54f, a third right-handing ramp 54g, a fourth right-handing ramp 54h, and a fifth right-handing ramp. A ramp 54i, a sixth right stamping die ramp 54j, and a seventh right stamping die ramp 54k are provided. A left and right punching platen lamp 54d, a first right punching platen lamp 54e, a second right punching platen lamp 54f, a third right punching platen lamp 54g, a fourth right punching platen lamp 54h, and a fifth right punching platen lamp 54i. And, the sixth right beating table lamp 54j and the seventh right beating table lamp 54k are all made to emit light so that the player can proceed with the game with a higher ball output rate when hitting the right side. can be shown. As shown in FIG. 2, the first left stamping ramp 54a and the sixth right stamping ramp 54j are arranged to face each other around the seventh right stamping ramp 54k. Each is provided in the flow path R2.

In addition, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the special figure 1, a special figure 2 indicator 81b that variably displays the special figure 2, and a general figure that is variably displayed. A normal map display 82 is included. In addition, the display device 8 has a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the number of special figures 1 pending (U1: the number of variable display of the special figure 1 by the special figure 1 indicator 81a is suspended), which will be described later. And the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b which displays the special figure 2 reservation number (U2: the number that the variable display of the special figure 2 by the special figure 2 indicator 81b is withheld) which will be described later is included.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 as a trigger. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 as a trigger. Winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 corresponds to "establishment of a predetermined condition" of the present invention. In addition, a special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, and the result of the special figure lottery is a big hit. Being there corresponds to "establishment of a specific condition" in the present invention. In the following description, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are collectively called the special figure, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are collectively called the special figure lottery. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure indicator 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation indicator 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The special figure to be stopped and displayed (stop special figure, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of kinds of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stop special figure is a predetermined special figure (a special figure of a specific stop mode, i.e., a jackpot pattern), the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 14 and the second large winning opening 15) are opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed.

The special figure indicator 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later), the special drawing indicator 81 displays "□□■■□□■■" (□: lighting, ■ : off), the jackpot pattern consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed. In addition, when the result of the special figure lottery is a loss, the special figure indicator 81 displays a losing pattern composed of lighting only the rightmost LED, such as "■■■■■■■□". do. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, an aspect in which each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, various random numbers (numerical information and determination information) for performing special lottery etc. example) may be acquired. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later as special figure reservation. In the following, various random numbers obtained by winning (entering the game ball) to the first start port 11 are referred to as "special figure 1 related random numbers", and winning the game ball to the second start port 12 Various random numbers obtained by (entry) are referred to as "special figure 2 related random numbers". Here, the special figure 1 relation random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 relation random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. To the number of special figures 1 reservation that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figures 1 reservation) and the number of special figures 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figures 2 reservations) can set an upper limit (for example, 4). In the following, the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation", and the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". In addition, the special figure 1 relation random number and the special figure 2 relation random number are collectively referred to as "special figure relation random number".

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, specifically, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. If there is a prize during the execution of the jackpot game (special game), the variable display of the special figure for the prize (or the right of the special figure lottery) can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is terminated when the variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, the digestion of the special figure reservation means that the special figure relation random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and the variable display of the special figure for showing the determination result is executed.

And the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 83 . Each of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special figure reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special figure reservations. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is variably displayed, the display is stopped. The normal map to be stopped and displayed (stop normal map, normal map derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal map selected from a plurality of types of normal map lottery. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (predetermined stop mode normal pattern, ie, winning pattern), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D). .

The general pattern indicator 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the general pattern corresponding to the result of the general pattern lottery by its lighting mode. When the result of the normal pattern lottery is winning, the normal pattern display 82 displays a winning pattern composed of lighting of both LEDs such as "□□" (□: lighting, ■: lighting off). In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, a losing pattern composed of only the right LED lighting is displayed, such as "■□". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate.

In addition, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the normal map is variably displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is, for example, an aspect in which both LEDs alternately light up. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a normal symbol random number (an example of numerical information or determination information) for performing a general pattern lottery may be acquired. This random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106, which will be described later, on condition that the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is not being executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, four) to the number of normal pattern reservations (the number of normal pattern reservations) that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106 . In the following, the normal symbol random number obtained by passing the game ball through the gate 13 is also referred to as "normal symbol related random number".

Next, the production unit 1U attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The production unit 1U is formed by unitizing a plurality of devices that mainly produce production. An image display device 50, a first panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on-board movable device") 55, and a second panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "under-board movable device") 56 are mounted on the effect unit 1U.

The image display device 50 (display unit) is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc., and has a display unit 50a (display screen) capable of displaying patterns and the like.

The on-board movable device 55 is arranged in front of the display section 50a, is movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k (movable body). The underboard movable device 56 is arranged in front of the display section 50a, is movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated underboard movable body 56k.

FIG. 5(A) schematically shows how the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, the on-board movable body 55k moves (lowers) downward (see FIG. 5B), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 is driven, the under-board movable body 55k moves downward. 56k moves (rises) upward (see FIG. 5(B)). That is, by driving the drive source of the board movable device 55, the board movable body 55k is moved (lowered) downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) (see FIG. 5(B)), and the board By driving the drive source of the lower movable device 56, the lower board movable body 56k is moved (raised) upward for the player (that is, above the pachinko game machine PY1) (see FIG. 5(B)). At this time, the image display device 50 is covered with the lowered upper board movable body 55k or the raised lower board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko game machine PY1 has a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, a variable display of a normal figure, an auxiliary game, and the like. A game control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls game profits (progress of the game), game effects according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 (special figure fluctuation effect (determination result suggestion effect), suspension effect, jackpot game effect), customer waiting effect, operation promotion effect that prompts operation during the period when the operation of the normal button 40 or the special button 41 is valid (operation valid period), etc. A control board") 120, and a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. are provided further behind the image display device 50 of the game board 1. FIG. The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls games. In addition, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section that controls effects together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the sound control circuit 161, which will be described later. In addition, the production control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and production means (image display device 50, speaker 52 (output means), frame lamp 53, board lamp 54 (first left-handed board lamp 54a, second left-handed lathe lamp 54b, third left lathe lamp 54c, left and right lathe lamp 54d, first right lathe lamp 54e, second right lathe lamp 54f, third right lathe lamp 54g, fourth right lathe lamp 54h, 5th right beating table lamp 54i, 6th right beating table lamp 54j, 7th right beating table lamp 54k, etc.), and movable devices 55, 56, etc.) using game production, customer waiting production, and operation promotion production It should be controllable.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a power board 190. As shown in FIG. The power board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190 . The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the effect RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered off. A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . By turning the power switch 191 ON or OFF, the power is turned on and off. A backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100 , or a backup power supply circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 may be provided on the sub control board 120 .

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a game ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 contains a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a normal figure variation pattern determination table. , Auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached. In addition, the game RAM 104 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105, normal figure reservation storage unit 106, and the like.

In addition, the main control board 100 has a game I/O (Input/Output) port unit 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and a game CPU 102 for clearing information stored in the game RAM 104. A RAM clear switch 119 is mounted for this purpose.

Various sensors MS and various actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100 . The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting hole sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11, and a second starting hole sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12. A starting opening sensor, a general winning opening sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10, a gate sensor that detects a gaming ball that has passed through the gate 13, and a first winning opening that detects a game ball that has won a first large winning opening 14. A big winning hole sensor, a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15, a specific area sensor 16a that detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16), And, a non-specific area sensor 17a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17) is included. When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection. The types and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric throttle solenoid for driving the electric throttle opening/closing member 12k of the electric throttle 12D, and a normal AT opening/closing member 14k for the first prize winning device 14D. 1 big winning opening solenoid, the second big winning opening solenoid that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D, and the distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D are included. . The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected with the display devices 8 (special figure display device 81, normal figure display device 82, and special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. , and a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . The firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 pays out prize balls using the prize ball payout device 73 and the rental ball payout device 74 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU. Or pay out rental balls. The number of game balls to be paid out is output to the payout control board 170 .

The shooting device 72 is also provided with a touch switch capable of detecting contact with a handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72 k , the touch switch detects the player's contact with the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 . Also, the firing device 72 is connected to a firing volume knob capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting solenoid so that the game ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

In addition, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the sub-control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the main control board 100 , the sub-control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control details) by the main control board 100 . The connection between the main control board 100 and the sub control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 120 . That is, between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 (performance control means) includes a performance ROM 123 storing a program or the like for controlling performance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and A performance CPU 122 for executing a program stored in a performance ROM 123 is included.

Further, the effect ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Also, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect I/O port section 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139 . The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 is operated by the power supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1 from a predetermined island power supply (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply, the power board 190 operates. It operates by power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not powered on. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the sub-control board 120 . A circuit including a capacitor or an internal battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the sub control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the sub control board 120 is based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100, to the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140. 50 display control is performed. The connection between the sub-control board 120 and the image control board 140 enables both transmission of signals from the sub-control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the sub-control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It has Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured in one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including background images) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, effect sound, etc. from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161. to output

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control circuit 161 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the sub-control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the sub-control board 120 . Also, the sub-control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Also, the sub-control board 120 performs lighting control of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100 .

Various switches connected to the sub-control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 has been pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each of the detection switches 40a and 41a outputs a signal to the sub-control board 120 according to the content of detection. The type and number of switches connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the sub-control board 120 include motors for driving the on-board movable device 55, the under-board movable device 56, the frame movable device 58, and the like. It is possible to cause a predetermined operation to be performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151 . The type and number of actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various lamps SL connected to the sub-control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54 (a first left beating board lamp 54a, a second left beating board lamp 54b, a third left beating board lamp 54c, a left and right beating board A ramp 54d, a first right beating ramp 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, and a sixth right beating ramp 54j. , seventh right hammer lamp 54k, etc.), etc., and causes each lamp to emit light. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, light emission color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute lighting control of each lamp and operation control of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM. Also, the type and number of lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 conducts a normal drawing lottery when the shot game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later. When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a general-pattern related random number when the general-pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied in performing such a series of games (normal-pattern lottery, variable display of the general-pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 8(A), normal pattern random numbers are included in general pattern random numbers to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using one or a plurality of hit determination tables as shown in FIG. 9(A). The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. That is, the game state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and the time-saving state hit determination table (for time-saving It is possible to distinguish between the hit determination table) and the In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number) is distributed to the hit and the loss, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination for performing the variable display of the normal pattern is performed. If the result of the hit determination is hit, basically, the hit pattern is displayed in a variable display of the normal pattern and stopped. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. Also, the probability of winning a prize can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal figure fluctuation Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal figure fluctuation pattern using one or more normal figure fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in FIG. 9(B). The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state. That is, as the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state ( It is possible to distinguish between time-saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table).

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure of loss (losing general figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be a normal figure fluctuation pattern, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning pattern For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped and displayed is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed For the variable display of the figure, a normal figure variation pattern is determined in which the normal figure variation time is, for example, 5 seconds. The variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . Moreover, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived).

Auxiliary games include elements (auxiliary game components) that constitute the auxiliary game, that is, various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a game state. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using one or more auxiliary game control tables as shown in FIG. 9(C) based on the game state. The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Also, the number of times of opening and the opening time in each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time (time (for example, 0.08 seconds) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew 12D). In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is held for a second opening time longer than the first opening time (a time (for example, 3.00 seconds) that makes it easy to win the game ball with the electric chew 12D). Open. In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as "long open auxiliary game".

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big win game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12. - 特許庁When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

In the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 11 is called "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting hole 12 is called "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a special figure-related random number when the starting condition is established, and performs the series of games (special figure lottery, variable display of the special figure, jackpot game, game state setting). Various decisions are made on random numbers. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol-related random numbers to be acquired include special symbol random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for judging the jackpot symbol type. A reach random number is a random number for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Note that the random number is also called determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) using one or a plurality of jackpot determination tables as shown in FIG. 10(A). The game state includes a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether it is the normal probability state or the high probability state. That is, as the jackpot determination table, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table). It is possible.

In each jackpot determination table, a judgment value (special symbol random number value) of the special symbol random number is distributed to the jackpot and loss, which are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired special symbol random number with a big win determination table to determine whether it is a big win or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the winning probability of the jackpot.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination The jackpot pattern type determination is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, uses one or more jackpot pattern type determination tables as shown in FIG. ) is a judgment for determining It is possible to associate the content of the big win, in other words, the constituent elements of the big win including the game privilege given to the player, for each type of the big win symbol.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of the starting port where the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that generated the jackpot symbol type determination) was performed. is possible. That is, as the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the jackpot used when performing the variable display of the special figure 2 It is possible to distinguish from the symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot patterns, and in each jackpot pattern type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is distributed to the jackpot pattern type that is the result of the jackpot pattern type determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random numbers are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10(B), the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type by the jackpot pattern type determination for the special pattern 1 is set to 50% for the jackpot pattern X and 50% for the jackpot pattern Y, and for the special pattern 2 It is possible for the jackpot pattern Z to make the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type determined by the jackpot pattern type determination 100%. In this way, in the special figure 1 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the first start port 11 and the special figure 2 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the second start port 12, the swing of the jackpot symbol type Different fractions are possible.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, uses one or more reach determination tables as shown in FIG. This is a judgment for determining whether

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state. That is, as the reach determination table, the reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state and the reach determination table (time-saving reach determination table) used in the time-saving state are distinguished. Is possible.

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random value) is distributed to the reach determination results "with reach (generate reach)" and "no reach (not generate reach)". . Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (whether or not to generate reach). As shown in FIG. 10(C), it is possible to change the number of reach random numbers determined to be “with reach (generate reach)” between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. is. In the following, "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is referred to as "losing with reach", and "no reach (not generating reach)". )” is sometimes called “no reach”.

3-2-4. Toku-zu variation Toku-zu variation pattern determination uses one or more special symbol variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table) as shown in FIGS. It is a determination for determining (special figure variation pattern), and is performed in any case of a big hit or a loss as a result of the big hit determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and production flow (production content) of special figure fluctuation production, it is possible to include identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination. As a special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns with different identification information, respectively, and the number can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined, in other words, the type of starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination is performed. That is, as the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the special figure 2 are performed It is possible to distinguish the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when.

Each special figure variation pattern determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. That is, as a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a special figure 1 used in the time saving state It is possible to distinguish from the variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state It is possible to distinguish from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided for each game state.

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state can be further associated with the jackpot determination result, the jackpot symbol type determination result, or the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), a reach loss, and a reach no loss. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), reach with loss, and reach without loss.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss can be associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss. In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss can be associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is used when it is 3 to 4 It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss.

Then, the variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . Then, in the special figure variable display, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a display result (special figure lottery result), the next special figure variable display is not performed immediately, and the jackpot game is executed subsequently. be.

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation production as shown in the second column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 and 12.

In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, the special figure fluctuation pattern can be named in association with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production. be. For example, the special figure variation pattern related to the jackpot is called "jackpot variation". On the other hand, in the loss with reach, SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed. The figure fluctuation pattern is "L loss fluctuation", the special figure fluctuation pattern where the special figure fluctuation production ends with N reach (normal reach production), which is a type of reach, in the loss with reach "N loss fluctuation", The special figure variation pattern related to reach no loss is called "normal loss variation".

3-2-5. Prefetching determination Pachinko game machine PY1 performs prefetching determination using one or a plurality of prefetching determination tables as shown in FIG. 13 based on the acquired special figure-related random numbers. For the look-ahead determination, for example, determination of whether or not the special symbol random number is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination, determination of which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined in the jackpot symbol type determination, special There is a determination of which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined in the special figure variation pattern determination. The look-ahead determination table can be associated with the type of starting opening related to the starting prize. That is, as the lookahead determination table, a lookahead determination table (first lookahead determination table) when winning the first start opening 11 and a lookahead determination table (second lookahead determination table) when winning the second start opening 12 are used. , can be distinguished.

Also, the look-ahead determination table can be associated with the game state. That is, as the prefetching determination table, the prefetching determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving prefetching determination table) and the prefetching determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving prefetching determination table) are distinguished. Is possible.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the time-saving state, and the second look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state. It is possible to distinguish between this and the second look-ahead determination table used in the time saving state. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be described. The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and the time between the start of the jackpot game and the start of the first round game. It includes an opening (also referred to as OP) and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending. Moreover, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. In addition, below, the round game of the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Elements that make up such a jackpot game (jackpot game components) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning port (first big winning port 14 or second big winning port 15) in each round game, Includes the type and opening time of each opening (opening pattern), the time to close until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). ing. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or a plurality of jackpot game control tables as shown in FIG. 14 after the stop display of the special figure. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. As jackpot games, it is possible to control one type or a plurality of types of jackpot games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14, from 1R to 10R, the round game in which the first big winning opening 14 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or the first big winning opening 14 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. A round game to open is performed. Then, in 10R (final round), there is a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. done. Further, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning opening sensor, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning openings 14 and 15 elapses, End the round game.

Also, the number of times and time for each element can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, it is possible to perform the jackpot game using both the first big winning port 14 and the second big winning port 15 or using only one of them.

Here, the specific area 16 will be described in detail. Since the specific area 16 takes a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won by the distribution member 16k, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16. FIG. Hereinafter, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k is also referred to as "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16". In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operation mode (a constant opening and closing mode of the specific area 16), but a constant operation mode of the distribution member 16k (a constant opening and closing mode of the specific area 16), The difficulty (easiness) of entering the game ball into the specific area 16 in the big win game is set in combination with the opening/closing mode of the second big winning hole 15 in the big win game. Note that hereinafter, the open state of the specific region 16 is also referred to as “V open”.

The distribution solenoid 16s is energized for 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening is started, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15 and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state Due to the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15, the time and Due to the timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). Thus, in the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening and closing member with the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage") The VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k are operated in the jackpot game in which the 15k and the distribution member 16k operate, and in the second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to execute a jackpot game. Thus, the big hit game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V long open pattern is called "V long big hit". On the other hand, a big hit game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V short open pattern is called "V short big hit".

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be described. Pachinko machine PY1, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make it into any game state of "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base game state" is "low probability low base state", "low probability high base game state" is "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base game state" is "high probability". "Low base state" and "high probability high base gaming state" can be abbreviated as "high probability high base state", respectively. As states constituting the game state, there are a state related to the probability of being determined as a "big win" in the big win determination and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state. Incidentally, the jackpot game state corresponds to the "special game state" of the present invention. Also, the low probability low base game state corresponds to the "normal game state" of the present invention. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state corresponds to the "advantageous gaming state" of the present invention.

The normal probability state is set in the "low-probability low-base game state" or "low-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is a normal probability. The high-probability state is set in the "high-probability low-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high-probability state is more advantageous to the player than the normal-probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning a jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, it is possible to switch to a high probability state by passing a game ball through the specific area 16 in a jackpot game. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high-probability state can be switched from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state by performing a predetermined number of jackpot determinations without winning the jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in the "low probability low base game state", "high probability low base game state" or "jackpot game state". The time-saving state is set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and compared to the non-time-saving state, the game state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game tends to be longer. is. For example, in the time-saving state, the opening time (eg, 3.00 seconds) is longer than the opening time (eg, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time-saving state. Also, in the time saving state, using the special figure variation pattern determination table that is determined so that the special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time is selected more than the non-time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination is (See FIGS. 11 and 12). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

Moreover, compared with a non-work-saving state, a time-saving state can make normal figure fluctuation|variation time short easily. For example, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-working time saving state is determined. Therefore, the time saving state has more execution times of the normal drawing lottery per unit time.

In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the time saving state to be determined to be a hit in the hit determination as compared with the non-time saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a higher probability (eg, 59936/65536) than the probability (eg, 6600/65536) determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state has a larger number of hit determinations per unit time.

Thus, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and the game balls are likely to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a jackpot election without greatly reducing the number of game balls possessed. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time-saving state is set. Then, for example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. The time-saving state can be changed from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state by performing a predetermined number of big win determinations without winning the big win or by winning the next big win.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win a win than in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to be long. There are three points about the game related to the normal figure, which are set to be advantageous to the player. However, the points that are set in favor of this player may be some of them.

In addition, the game state after the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time is a "low-probability low-base game state" in which a normal probability state and a non-time-saving state are set. This game state is also called "normal game state". In addition, in the "jackpot game state", the hit determination is performed but the jackpot determination is not performed, so a non-time-saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. As for the game state, it is possible to use all or part of the game states described above.

4. Main Effects by Game Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 22. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a variable probability production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special variable production is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure fluctuation production and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A-1, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effects of the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 16(A-2). is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume setting of sound output from the speaker 52, brightness setting of the display unit 50a (“light amount setting”), frequency setting of effects to be executed (“effect setting”), and the like.

Normal production mode can be set when special figure fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base game state" or "high probability low base game state", and it is a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state be. In the normal effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-1, a first normal effect mode in which a background image (daytime normal background image G102) representing a daytime mountain view is displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 16(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image (ordinary evening background image G103) representing the scenery of the mountains in the evening is displayed on the display unit 50a; As shown in -3), there is a third normal effect mode in which a background image (normal nighttime background image G104) representing a mountain view at night is displayed on the display unit 50a. It can be switched as one condition that the special figure fluctuation effect is performed once or more times. Further, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal front-stage performance mode before reach is established and a normal rear-stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the normal front stage effect mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display unit 50a. A custom background image will be displayed. Also, a special performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when the special figure fluctuation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-4, a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, the probability variation performance mode includes a probability variation front stage performance mode before the reach is established and a probability variation rear stage performance mode after the reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the variable probability front stage effect mode, the probability variable background image G105 is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the variable probability latter stage effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when a special figure variation performance is being performed in the "low-probability high-base game state", and is a performance mode indicating a normal probability state and a time-saving state. In the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-5, a background image representing the sky (time saving background image G106) is displayed on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, the time reduction performance mode includes a time reduction front stage performance mode before reach is established and a time reduction rear stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the time saving front stage production mode, the background image G106 for time saving is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the time saving rear stage production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when the jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot production mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A big win opening effect is performed in which a winning image G108 is displayed. During the round of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16(C-2), the display unit 50a displays a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out. A round production will be performed. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-3), the ending image G111 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls are indicated on the display unit 50a. A jackpot ending production is performed in which the total prize number image G112 is displayed.

It should be noted that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production (also simply referred to as "variation production") will be described. Pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special figure is started, the special figure variation pattern and the special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed. In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. The production pattern is composed of, for example, number patterns of 1 to 9, and in the variable display of the production pattern, the production pattern fluctuates with the start of the variable display of the special figure, and the production pattern with the end of the variable display of the special figure. stops. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. Then, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production pattern.

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation production, in addition to the fluctuation display of the production pattern, various functions such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, and the special button 41 It is possible to perform other productions using a production device. In this case, other effects can be continued even after the stop display of the effect symbols.

4-2-1. Effect Symbol Display Area In the display portion 50a of the image display device 50, as shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle effect symbol area 50b2, and a right effect symbol area 50b3. The left effect symbol area 50b1 is an area for displaying the left effect symbol EZ1 when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect. Similarly, the middle production design area 50b2 and the right production design area 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle production design EZ2 and the right production design EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in a section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display section 50a. The small pattern area 50c is an area for variably displaying the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when the special symbols are variably displayed. The small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are composed of numeral patterns 1 to 9, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 17(A), the left effect pattern area 50b1, the medium effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1. , middle effect symbol region 50b2, right effect symbol region 50b3, and small symbol region 50c, but are not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special figure is started, for example, as shown in FIG. Left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 are stopped and displayed, variable display of special symbols is not performed, and from the state of waiting for variable display of special symbols, FIG. 17 (B) , along with the start, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is started. In addition, "↓" in FIG. 17 indicates that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is, for example, "normal loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 17 (C-1), the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are different. After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (so-called split eyes) suggesting a loss, as shown in FIG. 17(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. There are a plurality of types of stop modes that indicate a failure, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6", in which the symbols on the left and right sides are not the same. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern with reach such as "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode (so-called reach eye), and the reach is established. At this time, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed, and the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is performed. It should be noted that the stop order and stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko game machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established in the normal variation. The N reach is an effect suggesting that the result of the big win determination may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 18 (A), the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. decelerates to Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stop mode suggesting reach-losing. There are a plurality of types of stopping modes that suggest reach-losing, such as "7, 6, 7" and "5, 3, 5", in which the left and right symbols are the same and the middle symbols are different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. indicate. There are a plurality of types of stop modes suggesting a big win, such as "7, 7, 7" and "2, 2, 2", in which the left and right symbols are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. It should be noted that the content of the N reach effect is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium effect symbol EZ2, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2-4. SP reach The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the result of the big win determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 indicating that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 19B, an SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle effect) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only production is reached, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the special figure variable display is, for example, "SP jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1), the display unit At 50a, an effect suggesting a big win (for example, a display in which the main character is happy to have won a battle) is performed, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win. indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode suggesting reach-losing. At this time, the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change or add the contents of the effect of the SP reach.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each ready-to-win are stopped in a mode indicating a big win (big win expectation) will be described in detail. The degree of jackpot expectation for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the result of jackpot determination. For example, if the execution probability of N reach is set to 10% when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and is set to 100% when the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”, the execution probability of SP reach is If the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", it is set to 4%, and if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot", it is set to 100%. Can be set higher. In addition, SP reach A and SP reach B are made executable as SP reach, the execution probability of SP reach A is set to 2% when the result of big hit determination is ``losing'', and the result of big hit determination is ``big hit''. In the case of 20%, the execution probability of SP reach B is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot". For example, it is possible to set the SP reach B jackpot expectation higher than the SP reach A jackpot expectation. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the judgment of the big win, it is possible to set the expected degree of the big win.

4-3. Suspended Icon Display Area The display unit 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a suspended icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 20(A). The pending icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a fourth display area 50d4, depending on the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending, each A pending icon HA (hold display) can be displayed in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4. For example, when the special figure 1 reserved number is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the special figure 1 reserved number is "2", the first display area 50d1 and the second 2 display area 50d2 and the pending icon HA is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20A, it is possible to provide an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area in the vicinity of the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the icon TA that is the same as or different from the pending icon HA in accordance with the start of the special figure variation effect.

It should be noted that the number of display areas forming the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the pending icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, or a display area that displays only one of them.

4-3-1. Suspension effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a suspension effect in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. - 特許庁The pending effect can notify the player of the number of special figure 1 suspension or special figure 2 suspension.

In the pending effect, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 when the special figure 1 pending number is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls win the first starting hole 11 during the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. A pending icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is completed and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. The player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Notice Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a notice effect at an arbitrary timing during the special figure variation effect. The notice effect is the effect using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the input devices 40, 41, etc., and the result of the jackpot determination and the special figure variation pattern. It is possible to suggest the result of the judgment.

4-4-1. Movable Body Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as an advance notice effect. The movable body performance is a performance for operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the movable body production, for example, when developing from N reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a from the player's point of view, developing into SP reach. At this time, the effect image is displayed in the space of the display unit 50a that does not overlap the on-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. Note that the movable body presentation is not limited to suggestions for developing SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4-2. Operation Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation effect using the normal button 40 and the special button 41 as an advance notice effect. The operation performance is a performance in which the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the operation effect, for example, in SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the special button 41 is valid (button operation valid period) occurs, and as this button operation valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. , an effect for prompting the operation of the special button 41 (button operation promotion effect) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, a button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display section 50a. The button operation prompting image G3 includes an image (button image G31) simulating the special button 41, an image (button pressing operation image G32) representing the operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the special button 41, and a button operation effective period. and an image representing the remaining time (operation effective period remaining time image G33). Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Thereafter, when the special button 41 is pressed during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period elapses without the special button 41 being operated during the button operation valid period, FIG. , the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a from the player's point of view, suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. Note that the operation effect is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-3. Prefetching Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a prefetching effect for the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve in which the special figure lottery is not performed as the notice effect. The look-ahead performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special figure lottery for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 suspension is "jackpot", as shown in FIG. may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "missing", the pending icon HA may be displayed as "*" as a so-called fake effect. In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, it is not limited to changing the display mode of the hold icon HA, and it is possible to change or add as appropriate. For example, it is possible to change the stop mode of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special figure fluctuation production.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 (game control means) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, timers, buffers, and the like appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 .

[1. Main control main processing]
The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the main control board 100 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 23 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on process, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B are updated by adding 1 to them. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various types of normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) The process of updating the random number counter value is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004).

[2. Main side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed subsequent to the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101, for example, captures the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and plays the game as the lower tray full data. stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104 for use.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B includes the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main-side timer interrupt processing ( S005) is completed and the period until the next main side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S106). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

After the special action process (S106), a sorting device control process for controlling the sorting device 16D is performed (S107).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S108) and terminates the main side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S108), a power-off monitoring process when the power is cut off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. In addition, as other processing (S108), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 according to the winning of the game ball into each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time (see FIG. 23), and an interrupt pulse is input. (After about 4 msec), the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs the command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous main side timer interrupt processing (S005). etc.

[2-1. Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection process (S104), the general winning opening sensor process, the gate sensor process, the second starting opening sensor process, the first starting opening sensor process, the first big winning opening sensor process, the second big winning opening sensor process, the specific area Sensor processing is performed sequentially. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

In the general winning opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the general winning opening sensor. Also, according to the result of the processing, a command for the general winning opening sensor is generated.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage part 106 provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random numbers are not stored. Also, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second start sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start sensor. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, a special symbol 2 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. be. In addition, when the Toku-zu 2 relation random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 2 relation random number is not stored. In addition, the second look-ahead determination is performed using the obtained Toku-zu 2 related random number and the second look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the second look-ahead determination Generate a command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting win command representing the result.

In the first start sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start sensor. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, a special symbol 1 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area be. It should be noted that, when the Toku-zu 1-related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 1-related random number is not stored. In addition, the first prefetching determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first prefetching determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 1 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (number of special figure 1 reservations) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the first look-ahead determination Generate a command for the first start opening sensor including a first start win command representing the result.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor. Also, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor. Also, a command for the second big winning opening sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor. Also, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

[2-2. Normal operation processing]
In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol standby process, normal symbol variation process, normal symbol determination process, and auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process, the hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reservation storage unit 106. - 特許庁In addition, based on the current gaming state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed to determine the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, to generate a normal pattern fluctuation start command including information about the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, based on the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern display device 82 is caused to start variable display of the normal pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process performed during the variable display of the normal pattern. In the normal pattern variation process, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result when the normal pattern variation time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal pattern being executed. Then, it generates a general pattern fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol determination process is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal design determination process, after a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the normal pattern being executed, the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. Determine whether or not there is If the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

Auxiliary game control processing is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Moreover, according to the result of the said process, the command for auxiliary game control is produced|generated.

[2-3. Special operation processing]
In the special action process (S106), a special symbol standby process, a special symbol variation process, a special symbol confirmation process, a big hit game control process, and a game state setting process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

[2-3-1. Special symbol standby process]
The special symbol standby process is not a jackpot game state, but a process performed during standby when variable display of special symbols is not performed. In the special symbol standby process, based on the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, along with performing the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 reservation storage unit Perform shift processing. Also, based on the special figure 1 related random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process are performed, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process is performed. .

In the special figure 2 determination process, the special symbol random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state are used. Then, a big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination for determining the jackpot pattern type is performed using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special figure 2 related random numbers and the special figure 2 jackpot pattern type determination table. Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated.

Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing is the processing which is done after special figure 2 decision processing. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and the special figure 2 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern table, determine the special figure 2 variation pattern. In addition, the determination of the special figure 2 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (special figure 2 reservation number) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b. And to generate a special figure 2 variation start command representing the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The special figure 2 variation start command includes information about being a special figure 2, information about the result of the jackpot determination, information about the result of the reach determination, information of the special figure variation time associated with the special figure 2 variation pattern, etc. included. Then, based on the special figure fluctuation time associated with the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, the special figure 2 indicator 81b is made to start the variable display of the special figure 2.

Special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 2 determination processing and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 2 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 2 reservation storage unit 105b. In this way, the Toku-zu 2 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were obtained. And to generate a special figure 2 reservation number command representing the special figure 2 reservation number after the processing.

In the special figure 1 determination process, the special symbol random number among the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state are used. Then, a big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination is performed by using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination table. Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated.

The special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 1 determination process. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure 1 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern table, determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. In addition, the determination of the special figure 1 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (the number of special figure 1 reservations) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, a special figure 1 variation start command representing the determined special figure 1 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 1 variation start command includes information about being a special figure 1, information about the result of the jackpot determination, information about the result of the reach determination, information about the result of the jackpot type determination, and the special figure 1 It was associated with the variation pattern. Information such as special figure fluctuation time is included. Then, based on the special figure variation time associated with the determined special figure 1 variation pattern, the special figure 1 indicator 81a is caused to start the variable display of the special figure 1.

Special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 1 determination processing and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 1 relationship random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 1 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 1 reservation storage unit 105a. In this way, the special figure 1 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were acquired. Then, to generate a special figure 1 reservation number command representing the special figure 1 reservation number after the processing.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, if there are both the special figure 2 reservation number and the special figure 1 reservation number, the special figure 2 determination process is performed with priority, and the variable display of the special figure 2 and the variable display of the special figure 1 are not performed in parallel.

[2-3-2. Special symbol variation processing]
The special symbol variation process is a process performed during variable display of special symbols. In the special symbol variation processing, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol indicator 81 is caused to end the variable display of the special symbol and stop displaying the special symbol according to the result of the big hit determination. If the result of the big win determination is a big win, the big win pattern indicating the big win is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the big win determination is a loss, the losing pattern indicating the loss is stopped and displayed. And, to generate a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the special figure.

[2-3-3. Special symbol confirmation process]
The special symbol determination process is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol determination process, when the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is a big winning symbol, the game state is shifted to a big winning game state. Then, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is generated. The opening command includes information about the result of the jackpot type determination. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a lost symbol and the high probability state is terminated, the normal probability state is set. Then, it generates a high-probability end command indicating transition to the normal-probability state. In addition, when the special figure currently stopped and displayed is a lost pattern and the time saving state is terminated, the non-time saving state is set. And the time saving end command which shows transition to non-time saving state is produced|generated. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a losing pattern and the number of reserved special figures 2 and the number of reserved special figures 1 are "0", the pachinko machine PY1 is waiting for a customer indicating that it is in a standby state. Generate commands.

[2-3-4. Jackpot game control process]
The jackpot game control process is a process performed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game is played using a jackpot game control table. After shifting to the jackpot game state, each round game is started according to the lapse of opening time or closing time. Then, a round game command indicating the start of the round game is generated. Also, the ending is started in accordance with the end of the final round game. Then, an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is generated. The ending command includes information about the result of jackpot type determination.

[2-3-5. Game state setting process]
The game state setting process is a process performed when the jackpot game state ends. In the game state setting process, when changing from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the high probability state is set at the end of the jackpot game state. When the duration of the high probability state is limited, the duration of the high probability state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the high probability state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, it generates a high-probability setting command indicating the setting of the high-probability state. In addition, when changing from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game state ends. When limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration of the time saving state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the time saving state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. And the time saving setting command which shows the setting of a time saving state is produced|generated.

The command generated by the game control microcomputer 101 in each process can be added or changed as appropriate.

6. Effect Control by Effect Control Microcomputer 121 Next, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the control of the effect by the following effect control microcomputer 121 are provided in the effect RAM 124 .

[1. Sub control main processing]
The effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the sub-control board 120 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. As an example of the method of updating the random number counter for effect determination for various effects, the same method as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed by the main control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This is the same in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140 . The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). Further, the sub-control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects by sound) along with various effects performed by the image control board 140, and controls the lamp. The frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light via the circuit 151 (executing various light emission effects by light emission), and the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are operated (various movable body effects are produced by actions). run or). The effect RAM 124 is provided with a start prize winning command pending storage section for storing a start prize winning command including pending lottery information. The reservation lottery information includes information based on each random number stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 of the main control board 100 . The start winning prize command reserve storage unit further includes a first start prize winning command reserve storage unit that stores a first start prize winning command based on the first special prize reserve, and a second start prize winning command that stores a second start prize command based on the second special prize reserve. 2 start winning command reserve storage unit is provided. In addition, the effect RAM 124 may be provided with a storage unit for storing a command including the information of the normal pattern hold. Specifically, the first start winning command reserve storage unit and the second start win prize command reserve storage unit are each provided with a storage area corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure reserve. In the pachinko game machine PY1, four storage areas are provided in the first start prize winning command reserve storage part and four storage areas are provided in the second start prize winning command reserve storage part in accordance with the upper limit number of special figure reserves. be done. Furthermore, each storage area is provided with a plurality of small areas. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a start winning command specified based on the winning of the start opening and data indicating the display mode of the pending icon HA are stored in each small area. The reception counter is used to manage winning order.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010) and sub-side timer interrupt processing (S4011) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011).

[2. Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec cycle) is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 26, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable device control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input process, an operation on an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a or the special button detection switch 41a, is detected. In the light emission data output process, light emission data is generated in order to cause the lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 to emit light at a timing that matches the image effect, etc., based on the effect data created in the effect data creation process, which will be described later. is output to the lamp control circuit 151 . That is, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, and the like to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable device control process, based on the performance data created in the performance data creation process, drive data is output in order to perform a movable body performance that operates the movable devices such as the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 at a predetermined timing. do. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable object effect by operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58 and the like in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. The watchdog timer process resets the watchdog timer. In the switch processing, the display contents of the display section 50a and the like are set based on the operation data of the operation sections that the player can operate, such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a detected in the input process. In the button valid period processing, the button operation valid period of various buttons (normal button 40, special button 41, etc.) is set. Thereby, for example, while the operation effect is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the button operation valid period is generated.

[10 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012), as shown in FIG. 27, received command analysis processing (S4201), effect timer update processing (S4202), voice control processing (S4203), and effect data creation processing (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process, the received interrupt process (S4010) analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124, and performs processing according to the command (for example, selection of production, setting of production mode, command setting, etc.). I do. In effect timer update processing, the timer for measuring the time for each effect is updated. For example, in the performance timer update process, the start timing and end timing of the operation effective period of the operation unit such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data for controlling the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the processing result of the received command analysis process. In the effect data creation process, the effect data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process.

In the switch process (S4106), the effect control microcomputer 121 may analyze the switch data acquired in the input process (S4104) and determine whether or not the normal button 40 has been pressed within the button operation valid period. be. For example, when the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the switch data acquired by the input process (S4104) and determines that the normal button 40 has been pressed within the button operation valid period, the normal button process is executed. . Here, the normal button process is, for example, a process of displaying a preview image on the display unit 50a, performing a movable object effect using the on-board movable object 55k, and the like. Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 may analyze the switch data acquired by the input process (S4104) and determine whether or not the special button 41 has been pressed within the button operation valid period. For example, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special button 41 has been pressed within the button operation valid period, special button processing is executed. Here, the special button process is, for example, a process of displaying a preview image on the display unit 50a, performing a movable object effect using the on-board movable object 55k, and the like.

Here, an example of processing when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the effect control microcomputer 121 is a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process (S4201), when it is determined that the fluctuation start command is received, as the fluctuation start command reception processing, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the command, fluctuation A performance pattern (sub-variation pattern) of performance is selected, information of the sub-variation pattern is set, and a variation performance start command including information of the sub-variation pattern is set in an output buffer. For example, when the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is SP variation (variation pattern associated with SP reach), select a sub variation pattern to perform SP reach, variation production start command corresponding to the sub variation pattern to the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed, corresponding to the selected sub-variation pattern A variable effect is realized. In addition, the flow of processing related to the realization of such effects is basically the same for other effects such as effects accompanying special games, waiting effects for customers, anticipation effects, so-called advance notice effects accompanying the changes, control of the effect mode, etc. are the same.

7. Description of Characteristic Points of Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1 of First Embodiment Characteristic points of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described in detail below. The first embodiment will be described below. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the first embodiment.

7-1. Game state of the first embodiment First, a jackpot game executable by the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 can execute various jackpot games (jackpot game X, jackpot game Y, jackpot game Z) shown in the jackpot game control table of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special figure 1 determination process (special figure determination process based on the winning to the first start port 11), "jackpot symbol Either "X" or "jackpot symbol Y" can be determined. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the "jackpot symbol X" at a rate of 50% and the "jackpot symbol Y" at a rate of 50%. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 can determine the "jackpot symbol Z" in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special figure 2 determination process (the special symbol determination process based on the winning to the second start port 12). More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the "jackpot symbol Z" at a rate of 100%.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment executes a jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot symbol type. Specifically, in the "jackpot game X" executed when the "jackpot pattern X" is determined, the round game is played ten times. Then, from 1R to 4R, the first big winning port 14 is opened over a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and from 5R to 9R, the first opening is opened over a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. The big winning hole 14 is opened, and the second big winning hole 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per one round game in 10R. From the 5th round to the 9th round of the jackpot game, the opening time of the first big winning hole 14 is extremely short, and in reality, the round is such that winning of the first big winning hole 14 cannot be expected. In other words, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 10 times, the substantial number of round games is 5 times.

In addition, in the "jackpot game Y" executed when the "jackpot pattern Y" is determined, the round game is performed ten times. Then, from 1R to 4R, the first big winning port 14 is opened over a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and from 5R to 9R, the first opening is opened over a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. The big winning opening 14 is opened, and the second big winning opening 15 is opened for 0.1 second at maximum per one round game in 10R. From the 5th round to the 9th round of the jackpot game, the opening time of the first big winning hole 14 is extremely short, and in reality, the round is such that winning of the first big winning hole 14 cannot be expected. That is, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 10 times, the substantial number of round games is 4 times.

Also, in the "jackpot game Z" executed when the "jackpot pattern Z" is determined, the round game is performed ten times. Then, from 1R to 9R, the first big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and in 10R, the second big prize opening is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Open 15. In other words, in this jackpot game, the total number of round games and the substantial number of round games are 10 times.

Therefore, "jackpot game Z" in which the number of substantial round games is 10 times is "jackpot game X" in which the number of substantial round games is 5 times, and "jackpot game X" in which the number of substantial round games is 4 times. It can be said that this is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than a certain "jackpot game Y".

Next, game states that can be controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the state of the jackpot game state in which any jackpot game of the aforementioned "jackpot game X", "jackpot game Y" and "jackpot game Z" is executed. Even later, set the time-saving state. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a high probability state after the jackpot game state in which one of the jackpot games of the "jackpot game X" and the "jackpot game Z" is executed, while setting the "jackpot game Y". A high probability state is not set after a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed (a normal probability state is set). Therefore, after the jackpot game state in which one of the jackpot games of the "jackpot game X" and the "jackpot game Z" is executed, the "high probability high base game state" in which the high probability state and the time saving state are set is entered. , After the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game of "jackpot game Y" is executed, it becomes a "low probability high base game state" in which the normal probability state and the time saving state are set. When the high probability state and the time saving state are set, the probability variation frequency is set to 100 times and the time saving frequency is set to 100 times. Here, the probability variable number of times is the upper limit execution number of variable display of the special figure in the high probability state (prescribed number of times). In addition, the time saving number of times is the upper limit execution number of times (prescribed number of times) of the variable display of the special figure in the time saving state. That is, the high-probability high-base gaming state can be continued up to 100 times of variable display of the special figure in the high-probability high-base gaming state. Moreover, when it sets to a low probability state and a time saving state, only the frequency|count of time saving is set to 100 times. That is, in the low-probability high-base gaming state, the number of variable display of the special figure in the low-probability high-base gaming state can be continued up to 100 times. In other words, it can be said that "jackpot game X" or "jackpot game Z" in which the high probability state is set thereafter is a jackpot game more advantageous to the player than "jackpot game Y" in which the high probability state is not set thereafter. It can be said that the jackpot game state in which the "jackpot game X" or the "jackpot game Z" is executed is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which the "jackpot game Y" is executed.

It should be noted that the jackpot game state can be said to be a game state more advantageous than the normal game state regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. In addition, the "high-probability high base game state", which is one of the high-probability states, can be said to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the "low-probability high-base game state", which is one of the normal probability states. In this specification, a game state that is advantageous to the player may be referred to as an advantageous game state or a special game state.

7-2. Special figure variation pattern of the first embodiment Next, the special figure variation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process when set to the non-time saving state, the result of the jackpot determination performed in the special figure 1 determination process, the reach determination result, the jackpot The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined based on the type of symbol and the special figure variation pattern random number. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is set to the non-time-saving state, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type is the jackpot symbol X. In some cases, any special figure 1 variation pattern is determined from among "P21", "P23", "P25", "P27", "P29", or "P31" as the special figure 1 variation pattern It is possible to Whether to determine which special figure 1 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. The allocation rate is as shown in FIG. 31(A). In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the allocation rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is set to the non-time saving state, when it is determined that the jackpot is elected in the jackpot determination, when the jackpot pattern type is the jackpot pattern Y Is, as a special figure 1 variation pattern, from among "P22", "P24", "P26", "P28", "P30", or "P32", it is possible to determine any special figure 1 variation pattern It is possible. Whether to determine which special figure 1 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. The allocation ratio is as shown in FIG. 31(B). In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is set to the non-time saving state, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, and when the result of the reach determination is "with reach", the special figure 1 As a variation pattern, determine any special figure 1 variation pattern from among "P05", "P33", "P34", "P35", "P36", "P37", "P38", or "P39" It is possible to Whether to determine which special figure 1 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. The distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. 31(C). In addition, about the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern shown in FIG.31(C), it is possible to change suitably in the range which does not interfere with a game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is set to the non-time saving state, if it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, and if the result of the reach determination is "no reach", the special figure 1 "P07" or "P08" can be determined as the variation pattern. Which of the two types of special figure 1 variation patterns is determined is assigned by the number of special figure 1 reservations. If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 to 2, the special figure variation pattern with a relatively long special figure variation time is easily determined, and if the special figure 1 reservation number is 3 to 4, the special figure variation Toku-zu fluctuation pattern with relatively short time is easily determined. The allocation ratio is as shown in FIG. 31(D). In addition, about the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern shown in FIG.31(D), it is possible to change suitably in the range which does not interfere with a game.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" is normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → joint battle jackpot variation 1 where joint battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" is normal variation → reach → It is a joint battle big hit variation 2 in which N reach → development production → joint battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P33" is normal fluctuation → reach → N reach → development production → joint battle reach is performed. . In addition, the reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of performance symbols that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, "7↓7" state) that is a combination of performance symbols indicating that the game state will be advantageous to the player (for example, that the game state will be a jackpot game state).

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23" is normal variation → reach → N reach → development challenge production → joint battle big hit variation 3 where joint battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" is normal variation → reach → N reach → Developed challenge production → Co-op reach is performed Co-op big hit fluctuation 4, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P34" is Normal fluctuation → Reach → N reach → Development challenge production → Co-op loss fluctuation where joint fight reach is done 2.

Here, the joint fighting reach (special effect, suggestive effect) is a victory effect (an example of a successful effect) in which the main character and his allied characters cooperate to challenge a battle against an enemy character, and in the end the main character wins. ), or an effect branching to a defeat effect (an example of a failure effect) in which the main character is defeated (see FIG. 48). In addition, the joint fight reach is a reach performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination was a “jackpot” is higher than the L reach and the N reach, and is a performance for making the player expect a big hit. Function. In addition, joint fighting reach, battle reach (specific effect, suggestive effect) described later, and story reach described later are SP reach. In addition, the joint fight reach is a reach production that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" is higher than the battle reach described later. In joint fight reach, the success effect is a effect that suggests winning a jackpot, and the failure effect is an effect that suggests losing.

Here, the development challenge production is, in the special figure fluctuation production, when the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped in a stop mode that suggests reach loss (so-called reach loss eyes), Battle reach described later, or It is a production that suggests that it may develop into a joint struggle reach.

In addition, the temporary stop display means that the variation speed of the production pattern is "0", but it changes such as shaking at the position where the production pattern is displayed, and the expansion and contraction are repeated, and it is completely stopped. Say no state. On the other hand, the fixed stop display (definite stop display) and the final stop display (final stop display) refer to a state in which the performance symbols are completely stopped. The term "stop display" may refer to temporary stop display or fixed stop display.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P25" is a battle jackpot variation 1 in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P26" is normal variation → reach → It is a battle jackpot variation 2 in which N reach → development production → battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern “P35” is a battle loss variation 1 in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → battle reach is performed. .

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern “P27” is a battle jackpot variation 3 where normal variation → reach → N reach → development challenge production → battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern “P28” is normal variation → reach → N reach → development challenge production → battle jackpot variation 4 where battle reach is performed, special figure 1 variation pattern “P36” is normal variation → reach → N reach → development challenge production → battle loss variation where battle reach is performed 2.

Here, the battle reach means that the main character and the enemy character battle, and finally, a victory effect (an example of a successful effect) in which the main character wins, or a defeat effect (an example of a failure effect) in which the main character is defeated. One example) is a production that branches to (see FIG. 47). In addition, the battle reach is a reach effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" is higher than the L reach and the N reach, and is a effect for making the player expect a big win. Function. However, the battle reach is a reach production that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" is lower than the joint fight reach. In Battle Reach, the success effect is a effect that suggests winning a jackpot, and the failure effect is a effect that suggests a loss.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P29" is an L jackpot variation 1 in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → L reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P30" is normal variation → reach → It is L jackpot variation 2 in which N reach->development effect->L reach is performed, and special figure 1 variation pattern "P05" is L loss variation in which normal variation->reach->N reach->development effect->L reach is performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P31" is L reach or SP reach (co-fight reach, battle reach, story reach ), the N jackpot variation 1 in which none of the reach effects are performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P32" is normal variation → reach → N reach, and production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in reach. It is N jackpot variation 2 in which neither reach production is performed among L reach or SP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach, story reach). In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P37" is L reach or SP reach (co-fight reach, battle reach, story reach ), it is N loss variation 1 in which none of the ready-to-win effects are performed. In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P38" is L reach or SP reach (co-fighting reach, battle It is N loss variation 2 in which neither reach effect is performed among reach and story reach.

Also, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 13 seconds without the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 reaching reach. Moreover, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P08" shown in FIG. 29 is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 4 seconds without the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 reaching reach.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment is special figure 2 in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process when it is set to the time saving state (low probability high base game state, high probability high base game state) The special figure 2 variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination performed in the determination process, the result of reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern random number. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101, as shown in FIG. 30, when set to the time-saving state (low-probability high-base game state, high-probability high-base game state), the jackpot winning in the jackpot determination. When determined, it is possible to determine any special figure 2 variation pattern from among "P62", "P71", or "P72" as the special figure 2 variation pattern. Whether to determine which special figure 2 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. The allocation rate is as shown in FIG. 32(A). In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the allocation rate (selection rate) of the special figure 2 variation pattern shown in FIG.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is set to the time saving state (low probability high base game state, high probability high base game state), when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the reach determination result If is "with reach", as a special figure 2 variation pattern, "P64", "P73", or from among "P74", it is possible to determine any special figure 2 variation pattern . Whether to determine which special figure 2 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. The allocation ratio is as shown in FIG. 32(B). In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is set to the time saving state (low probability high base game state, high probability high base game state), when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the reach determination result is "no reach", it is possible to determine "P65" or "P66" as a special figure 2 variation pattern. Which of these two types of special figure 2 fluctuation patterns is determined is assigned by the number of special figure 2 reservations. If the special figure 2 pending number is 0 to 2, the special figure variation pattern with a relatively long special figure variation time is easily determined, and if the special figure 2 pending number is 3 to 4, the special figure variation Toku-zu fluctuation pattern with relatively short time is easily determined. The allocation ratio is as shown in FIG. 32(C). In addition, about the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern shown in FIG.32(C), it is possible to change suitably in the range which does not interfere with a game.

Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern "P71" is a story jackpot variation 1 in which normal variation → reach → story reach is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern "P73" is a story in which normal variation → reach → story reach is performed. Loss variation 1.

Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72" is a story jackpot variation 2 in which normal variation → reach → story reach → on-board movable body challenge production is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern "P74" is normal variation → reach →Story Reach→Story Loss Variation 2 in which a board movable body challenge effect is performed.

Here, the story reach is a presentation that displays a story about the main character and finally branches to a success presentation that leads to a good ending or a failure presentation that does not lead to a good ending (see FIG. 49). In Battle Reach, the main character and the enemy character battle, and in the end, the main character wins (an example of a successful production), or the main character is defeated (an example of a failure production). ) (see FIG. 49).

Here, the on-board movable body challenge effect is a stop mode (so-called reach loss) that suggests the reach loss of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect.
This is an effect that suggests the possibility of changing to a stop mode (so-called parallel) that suggests a big hit.

In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern "P62" is normal variation → reach, so that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are reach, but N reach, L reach, or SP reach (co-fight reach, battle reach, story reach) ), it is an immediate jackpot variation in which none of the ready-to-win effects are performed. In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern "P64" is normal variation → reach, so that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are reach, but N reach, L reach, or SP reach (co-fight reach, battle reach, story reach) ), it is an immediate loss variation in which none of the reach effects are performed.

Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern "P65" is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 6 seconds without the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 reaching reach. Moreover, the special figure 2 variation pattern "P66" shown in FIG. 30 is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 3 seconds without the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 reaching reach.

Next, among the main productions (normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach (co-fighting reach, battle reach, story reach)) that constitute the special figure fluctuation production in the special figure fluctuation pattern described above, SP reach Co-op reach, battle reach, and story reach will be explained in detail. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the effect image on the display unit 50a in each effect that constitutes the special figure fluctuation effect, and emits light using the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 according to the display of the effect image. Production, sound production using the speaker 52, production of movable bodies using movable devices 55, 56, 58 (such as production of movable bodies on the board), operation production using input devices (normal button 40, special button 41), etc. is executable.

<Joint Reach>
Co-fighting reach is a reach performance in which the main character cooperates with an ally character to battle an enemy character. Co-fighting ready-to-win has win-lose branches, and branches to a success presentation (victory presentation) in which the main character wins over the enemy character, or a failure presentation (defeat presentation) in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 48). The success effect, like the success effect in battle ready-to-win, functions as an effect to suggest to the player that he/she has won the jackpot. The failure effect functions as an effect to suggest to the player that he/she has not won the jackpot, similarly to the failure effect in the battle reach.

<Battle Reach>
Battle reach is a reach effect in which the main character and the enemy character battle. The battle ready-to-win has win-lose branches, and branches to a success presentation (victory presentation) in which the main character wins over the enemy character or a failure presentation (defeat presentation) in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 47). The success effect functions as a effect to suggest to the player that he or she has won a jackpot, similar to the success effect in the joint fight reach. The failure effect functions as an effect to suggest to the player that he/she has not won the jackpot, like the failure effect in the joint fight reach.

<Story reach>
The story reach is a reach production that presents a story about a work that is the motif of the pachinko game machine PY1. The story reach has hit-lose branches, and branches into a success effect in which the story ends with a good ending, or a failure effect in which the story ends with a bad end (see FIG. 49). The success effect in the story reach functions as a effect suggesting to the player that he/she has won the jackpot. The failure effect in story reach functions as an effect suggesting to the player that he/she has not won the jackpot.

Next, the allocation rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 31(A), in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, it is selected in the case of "non-time-saving state", "jackpot" and when the type of jackpot pattern is "jackpot pattern X". The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern is the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P31" (1%) ⇒ the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P29" (2%) ⇒ special figure 1 variation pattern Distribution rate of "P23" (20%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" (24%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P27" (25%) ⇒ Special figure 1 variation The distribution rate (28%) of the pattern "P25" is higher in order.

Also, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment in the "non-time-saving state", in the case of "jackpot" and when the type of the jackpot pattern is "jackpot pattern Y" The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern to be used is the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P32" (4%) ⇒ the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P30" (8%) ⇒ special figure 1 Distribution rate of variation pattern "P28" (10%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P26" (15%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" (28%) ⇒ Special figure It is higher in the order of the distribution rate (35%) of 1 fluctuation pattern "P22".

As shown in FIG. 31 (C), the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of "non-time saving state" and "loss with reach" in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment is the special figure 1 Distribution rate of variation pattern "P26" (2%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P25" (4%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P28" (10%) ⇒ Special figure Distribution rate of 1 variation pattern "P27" (14%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P05" (15%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P30" (25%) ⇒ Special It is higher in the order of the distribution rate (30%) of the FIG. 1 fluctuation pattern “P29”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 31 (D), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment in the "non-time saving state", the number of special figures 1 pending is "0 to 2", and "no reach loss" The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case is the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P08" (20%) ⇒ the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" (80%) is higher in the order of

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (D), the pachinko machine PY1 of the present embodiment is in a "non-time saving state", the number of special figures 1 pending is "3 to 4", and "no reach loss" The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected when increasing in order.

In this embodiment, as shown in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 28, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the jackpot symbol X is selected. The proportion (50%) of winning symbol Y is the same as the proportion (50%) of winning symbol Y being selected. Also, when comparing the table distribution rate shown in FIG. Among the variation patterns "P21", "P23", "P25", or "P27", there is only a few percent difference in the distribution rate of any special figure 1 variation pattern. However, when comparing the table allocation rate shown in FIG. The distribution rate of the variation pattern "P22" and the distribution rate of "P24" have a difference of 10% or more than the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P26" and the distribution rate of "P28". In addition, in the case of loss (in the case of loss variation), battle reach is set to be easier to execute than joint fight reach. That is, in this form, the joint fighting reach is a reach production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the battle reach. It should be noted that, in win-lose branches in various types of SP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach), it may be configured to perform an operation presentation for operating the operation unit (the normal button 40 and the special button 41).

Further, as shown in FIG. 31(A), when the jackpot is won (in the case of jackpot variation), when the type of the jackpot pattern is "jackpot pattern X", the battle reach is better than the joint fight reach. It is set to be easier to execute than As a result, the battle reach of this form is a reach effect with a high possibility of being controlled to a high probability high base game state after the end of the jackpot game than the joint fight reach.

Next, the distribution rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern in the time saving state (low probability high base game state, high probability high base game state) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 32(A), the distribution rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern selected in the case of "time saving state" and "jackpot" in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment is the special figure 2 variation pattern Distribution rate of "P62" (10%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P72" (20%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P71" (70%) ing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(B), the distribution rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern selected in the case of "time saving state" and "loss with reach" in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment is the special figure Distribution rate of 2 variation pattern "P74" (5%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 2 variation pattern "P73" (15%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 2 variation pattern "P64" (80%) is higher at

Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment in the "time saving state", the number of special figures 2 pending is "0 to 2", and "no reach loss" The distribution rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern selected when increasing in order.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), the pachinko machine PY1 of the present embodiment is in a "non-time saving state", the number of special figures 1 pending is "3 to 4", and "no reach loss" The distribution rate of the special figure 2 variation pattern selected when increasing in order.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32(A), when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot fluctuates), the story reach is set to be easily executed. On the other hand, in the case of loss (in the case of loss variation), the story reach is set to be difficult to execute. That is, in this form, the story reach is a reach effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. In addition, in the win-lose branch in the story reach, it may be configured to perform an operation presentation for operating the operation unit (the normal button 40 or the special button 41).

Also, in this form, when the jackpot is won (in the case of jackpot fluctuation), after the story reach is executed in the special figure fluctuation effect, the The movable body challenge effect is set to be easily executed. As a result, even if the story reach ends in the special figure fluctuation production and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting reach loss (so-called reach loss eyes), the on-board movable body challenge If the effect is executed, it can be said that there is a high possibility that the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 will be stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win. The production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called reach-losing) suggesting reach-losing, and from the depressed state, execution of the on-board movable body challenge production is expected to result in a big win. It becomes possible to

7-3. Prefetching determination Next, when the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment is in a non-time saving state, prefetching determination using the first prefetching determination table shown in FIG. 33 based on the acquired special figure relation random number I do. This look-ahead determination includes a big hit look-ahead determination as to whether or not the acquired special symbol random number is determined to be a "big hit" in the big hit determination, and a big hit design random number that determines which jackpot design. It includes a jackpot symbol type prefetch determination of whether the type is determined, and a variation pattern prefetch determination of which special figure variation pattern the acquired special figure variation pattern random number is determined in the special figure variation pattern determination. The game control microcomputer 101 determines the start winning command based on the result of the prefetch determination. Although the first prefetch determination table shown in FIG. 33 is used in the first embodiment, it is also possible to use the prefetch determination table shown in FIG. 13 together.

The game control microcomputer 101 is based on the result of the big hit look-ahead determination, the result of the big hit design type look-ahead determination, and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination in the first start-up sensor processing when the non-time saving state is set. to determine the starting winning command. As shown in FIG. 33, 20 types of starting prize winning commands, namely "command 05", "command 07", "command 21" to "command 38", can be determined as the starting prize winning command. In the first embodiment, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern determined by the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29, variation pattern prefetch determination is performed.

If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol X", and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "joint battle jackpot variation 1", "command 21 ” is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol Y", and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "joint battle jackpot variation 2", "command 22" ” is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big hit", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol X", and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "joint battle jackpot variation 3", "command 23 ” is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol Y", and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "joint battle jackpot variation 4", "command 24" ” is determined.

Also, if the result of the jackpot look-ahead judgment is "big hit", the result of the jackpot pattern type look-ahead judgment is "jackpot pattern X", and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead judgment is "battle jackpot fluctuation 1", " Command 25" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol Y", and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "battle jackpot variation 2", then "command 26 ” is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol X", and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "battle jackpot variation 3", then "command 27 ” is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol Y", and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "battle jackpot variation 4", "command 28 ” is determined.

Also, if the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big hit", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol X", and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "L jackpot variation 1", " Command 29" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol Y", and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "L jackpot variation 2", "command 30 ” is determined.

Also, if the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot pattern type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol X", and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "N jackpot variation 1", " Command 31" is determined. If the result of the jackpot look-ahead determination is "big win", the result of the jackpot symbol type look-ahead determination is "jackpot symbol Y", and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "N jackpot variation 2", "command 32 ” is determined.

When the result of the big win look-ahead determination is "losing" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "co-op losing variation 1", "command 33" is determined. Further, when the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "losing" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "co-op losing variation 2", "command 34" is determined. Further, when the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "losing" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "battle loss variation 1", "command 35" is determined. Further, when the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "losing" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "battle loss variation 2", "command 36" is determined. When the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "L loss variation", "command 05" is determined. When the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "N loss variation 1", "command 37" is determined. Further, when the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "N loss variation 2", "command 38" is determined. When the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "normal loss variation", "command 07" is determined.

7-4. Board Lamp In the first embodiment, the first left beating board lamp 54a, the second left beating board lamp 54b, the third left beating board lamp 54c, the left and right beating board lamps 54d, and the A first right-handing ramp 54e, a second right-handling ramp 54f, a third right-handling ramp 54g, a fourth right-handling ramp 54h, a fifth right-handing ramp 54i, and a sixth right-handling ramp. Using the lamp 54j and the seventh right beating board lamp 54k, it is possible to indicate whether the current game situation is appropriate for left-handed beating or right-handed betting to proceed with the game.

When the game state of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment shifts from the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state to the low-probability low-base game state, the player is urged to hit left. Therefore, the first left hammering lamp 54a, the second left hammering lamp 54b, the third left hammering lamp 54c, and the left and right hammering lamps 54d can all emit light. Also, when the game state of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment is controlled to the low probability low base game state, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery and the jackpot game is executed, In order to encourage the player to hit to the right, a left and right beating board lamp 54d, a first right beating board lamp 54e, a second right beating board lamp 54f, a third right beating board lamp 54g and a fourth right beating board lamp. 54h, the fifth right hammer lamp 54i, the sixth right hammer lamp 54j, and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k can all emit light.

Concerning a specific example in which the first left beating lamp 54a, the second left beating lamp 54b, the third left beating lamp 54c, and the left and right beating lamp 54d are illuminated to indicate left-handed beating to the player. , will be described with reference to FIG.

When the game state of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment is shifted to the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state, first, as shown in FIG. 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, the third left hammer lamp 54c, and the left and right hammer lamps 54d are all extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 34(A), the first left hammering lamp 54a, the second left hammering lamp 54b, the third left hammering lamp 54c, and the left and right hammering lamps 54d are all extinguished. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the left and right hammering table lamp 54d and the third left hammering table lamp 54c are lit as shown in FIG. 34(B). Subsequently, when the left and right hammer lamps 54d and the third left hammer lamp 54c are turned on (see FIG. 34(B)), immediately, as shown in FIG. , and the second left hammer lamp 54b are turned on. As a result, the first left hammer lamp 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, the third left hammer lamp 54c, and the left and right hammer lamps 54d are all turned on (Fig. 34 ( C)). The first left hammering lamp 54a, the second left hammering lamp 54b, the third left hammering lamp 54c, and the left and right hammering lamps 54d are all turned on (Fig. 34 (C ), by making the player shoot the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left, aiming at the first start opening 11 and the general winning school 10, low probability low It is possible to proceed with the game without being disadvantaged in the base game state.

Next, the left and right hammering ramps 54d, the first right driving ramp 54e, the second right driving ramp 54f, the third right driving ramp 54g, the fourth right driving ramp 54h, and the fifth right driving ramp. A specific example in which the board lamp 54i, the sixth right beating board lamp 54j, and the seventh right beating board lamp 54k are illuminated to indicate the player to hit to the right will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the game state of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment is controlled to the low-probability low-base game state, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery and the execution of the jackpot game is started, FIG. As shown in 35(A), a left and right punching platen lamp 54d, a first right punching platen lamp 54e, a second right punching platen lamp 54f, a third right punching platen lamp 54g, and a fourth right punching platen lamp 54h. Then, the fifth right hammer lamp 54i, the sixth right hammer lamp 54j, and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k are all extinguished.

As shown in FIG. 35(A), left and right hammering ramps 54d, a first right driving ramp 54e, a second right driving ramp 54f, a third right driving ramp 54g, and a fourth right driving ramp. 54h, the fifth right hammer lamp 54i, the sixth right hammer lamp 54j, and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k are all extinguished. As shown in (B), the left and right beating table lamp 54d, the first right beating table lamp 54e, the second right beating table lamp 54f, and the third right beating table lamp 54g are lit. When the left and right beating table lamp 54d, the first right beating table lamp 54e, the second right beating table lamp 54f, and the third right beating table lamp 54g are turned on (see FIG. 35(B)), the fourth The right hammer lamp 54h, the fifth right hammer lamp 54i, the sixth right hammer lamp 54j, and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k are lit (see FIG. 35(C)). As a result, the left and right stamping ramps 54d, the first right stamping ramp 54e, the second right stamping ramp 54f, the third right stamping ramp 54g, the fourth right stamping ramp 54h, and the fifth right stamping ramp 54h. All of the board lamp 54i, the sixth right beating board lamp 54j, and the seventh right beating board lamp 54k are turned on (see FIG. 35(C)). A left and right punching platen lamp 54d, a first right punching platen lamp 54e, a second right punching platen lamp 54f, a third right punching platen lamp 54g, a fourth right punching platen lamp 54h, and a fifth right punching platen lamp 54i. Then, the sixth right hammer lamp 54j and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k are all turned on (see FIG. 35(C)), so that the right hammer flows down the second flow path R2. By shooting the game ball in such a manner as to pass through the gate 13, aiming to win a prize to the second starting port 12, the first big winning port 14, or the second big winning port 15, the ball is hit to the right. It is possible to proceed with the game with a higher payout rate.

7-5. Board Lamp Light Emitting Effect In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, as described above, the first left beating board lamp 54a, the second left beating board lamp 54b, the third left beating board lamp 54c, and the left and right beating board A ramp 54d, a first right beating ramp 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, and a third In addition to showing the player the situation of hitting left and right using the 6 right hitting board lamp 54j and the 7th right hitting board lamp 54k, as a look-ahead effect, a board lamp light-emitting effect (light-emitting effect , It is also possible to perform a specific lighting effect).

Here, the board lamp lighting effect includes the first board lamp lighting effect (first specific light emitting effect, first light emitting effect) and the second board lamp light emitting effect (second specific light emitting effect, second light emitting effect). There is When the 1st board lamp lighting effect is executed, the 7th right hitting board lamp 54k is first turned on in blue. Subsequently, starting from the lighting of the seventh right hammering lamp 54k, four lamps of a first left hammering lamp 54a, a second left hammering lamp 54b, a third left hammering lamp 54c and a left and right hammering lamp 54d The board lamp 54 is lit in blue. Subsequently, the three lathe lamps 54 of the first right lathe lamp 54e, the second right lathe lamp 54f, and the third right lathe lamp 54g are lit in blue. Subsequently, the three plate lamps 54 of the fourth right plate lamp 54h, the fifth right plate lamp 54i and the sixth right plate lamp 54j are lit in blue. In the 1st board lamp lighting effect, the board lamps 54 provided around the display part 50a are turned on in blue in order around the display part 50a, thereby suggesting the player's expectation of a big win. It is a look-ahead performance.

When the second board lamp light emission effect is executed, first the seventh right beating board lamp 54k is lit in blue. Subsequently, starting from the lighting of the seventh right beating lamp 54k, the three board lamps 54 of the sixth right beating board lamp 54j, the fifth right beating board lamp 54i and the fourth right beating board lamp 54h are blue. is lit. Subsequently, the three board lamps 54 of the third right beating board lamp 54g, the second right beating board lamp 54f and the first right beating board lamp 54e are lit in blue. Subsequently, the four plate lamps 54 of the left and right plate lamp 54d, the third left plate lamp 54c, the second left plate lamp 54b and the first left plate lamp 54a are lit in blue. In the second board lamp light emission effect, the board lamps 54 provided around the display section 50a are turned on in blue in sequence in the counterclockwise direction around the display section 50a, thereby making the player expect a big win. It is a look-ahead production that suggests. It should be noted that the 2nd board lamp lighting effect is a look-ahead effect with a higher expectation for a big hit than the 1st board lamp lighting effect.

The effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment can determine whether or not to execute the first board lamp light effect by using the first board lamp light effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. ing. Specifically, in the first board lamp light emission effect selection process (S4404) of the start winning time process (S4302), the effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the start winning command, and refers to the first board lamp light emission effect execution lottery table. is used to determine whether or not to execute the first board lamp lighting effect.

When the starting prize winning command is "command 05", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 15%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 85%. When the starting prize winning command is "command 07", non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%.

Further, when the starting prize winning command is "command 21", the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 60%. be. When the starting prize winning command is "command 22", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 60%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 40%.

Further, when the starting winning command is "command 23", the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 60%. be. When the starting prize winning command is "command 24", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 60%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 40%.

In addition, when the starting winning command is "command 25", the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 30%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 70%. be. When the starting prize winning command is "command 26", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 65%.

Further, when the starting prize-winning command is "command 27", the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 30%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 70%. be. When the starting prize winning command is "command 28", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 65%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 29", the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 90%. be. When the starting winning command is "command 30", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 10%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 90%.

Further, when the starting prize winning command is "command 31", non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. When the starting prize winning command is "command 32", non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%.

In addition, when the starting winning command is "command 33", the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 20%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 80%. be. When the starting prize winning command is "command 34", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 20%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 80%.

Further, when the starting winning command is "command 35", the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 25%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 75%. be. When the starting prize winning command is "command 36", the execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 25%, and the non-execution of the first board lamp lighting performance is selected at a rate of 75%.

In addition, when the starting prize winning command is "command 37", non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. When the starting prize winning command is "command 38", non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%.

From the explanation using the execution lottery table of the first board lamp light emission effect shown in FIG. It is set so that the 1st board lamp lighting effect is easily executed. That is, when the first board lamp lighting performance as the look-ahead performance is executed, there is a higher possibility that the result of the look-ahead determination will be a big win than when the first board lamp lighting performance is not executed.

Also, from the explanation using the execution lottery table for the first round lamp light emission effect shown in FIG. , it is easier to execute the 1st board lamp lighting performance than when the result of the big win prefetch determination is 'big win' and the result of the big win pattern type prefetch determination is 'big win pattern X'. As a result, the light emission of the first board lamp, which is a look-ahead effect, is greater in the case of controlling to the low-probability high-base game state after the end of the jackpot game than in the case of controlling to the high-probability high-base game state after the end of the jackpot game. It is set so that the performance can be easily executed.

In addition, the result of the jackpot look-ahead judgment is "big hit", and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead judgment is "joint battle big hit fluctuation 1", "joint battle big hit fluctuation 2", "joint battle big hit fluctuation 3", or "joint battle big hit fluctuation 4" , In any case, the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead judgment is "battle jackpot fluctuation 1", "battle jackpot fluctuation 2", "battle jackpot fluctuation 3", or "battle jackpot fluctuation 4". It is set to make it easier to execute the first board lamp lighting effect than in a certain case. That is, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, when the first board lamp light emission effect is executed, the special figure 1 related random number resulting from the execution of the first board lamp light emission effect is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, in the special figure variation performance based on the result of the determination of whether or not it becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process, the joint fighting reach is more likely to be executed than the battle reach.

The production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment can determine whether or not to execute the second edition lamp lighting production as a look-ahead production using the execution lottery table for the second edition lamp lighting production shown in FIG. It is possible. Specifically, in the second board lamp light emission effect selection process (S4405) of the start winning time process (S4302), the effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the start winning command, and refers to the second board lamp light emission effect execution lottery table. is used to determine whether or not to execute the second edition lamp lighting effect.

When the starting prize winning command is "command 05" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. . On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 05" and non-execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 15%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 85%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 07" and non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is 100%. selected.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 21" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 21" and non-execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 45%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 55%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 22" and the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, the non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 22" and non-execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, the second board lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 55%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 45%.

In addition, when the starting winning command is "command 23" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 23" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 45%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 55%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 24" and execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 24" and non-execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 55%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 45%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 25" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 25" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 70%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 30%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 26" and execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 26" and non-execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 60%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 40%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 27" and execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 27" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 70%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 30%.

In addition, when the starting prize winning command is "command 28" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 28" and non-execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 60%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 40%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 29" and execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 29" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 10%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 90%.

In addition, when the starting winning command is "command 30" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 30" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 10%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 90%.

In addition, when the execution of the 1st board lamp lighting effect is not selected and the start winning command is "command 31", the non-execution of the 2nd board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. When the execution of the 1st edition lamp lighting effect is not selected and the start winning command is "command 32", the non-execution of the 1st edition lamp lighting presentation is selected at a rate of 100%. .

In addition, when the starting winning command is "command 33" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 33" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 25%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 75%.

In addition, when the starting prize winning command is "command 34" and the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 34" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 25%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 75%.

In addition, when the starting prize winning command is "command 35" and execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 35" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 20%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 80%.

In addition, when the start winning command is "command 36" and execution of the first edition lamp lighting effect is selected, non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. On the other hand, when the start winning command is "command 36" and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed at a rate of 20%. selected, and non-execution of the second edition lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 80%.

In addition, when the execution of the first board lamp lighting effect is not selected and the start winning command is "command 37", the non-execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. be done. When the execution of the 1st board lamp lighting effect is not selected and the start winning command is "command 38", the non-execution of the 1st board lamp lighting effect is selected at a rate of 100%. .

From the explanation using the execution lottery table of the second edition lamp light emission effect shown in FIG. The setting is such that the 2nd board lamp lighting effect is easily executed. That is, when the second board lamp lighting performance as the look-ahead performance is executed, the possibility that the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit is higher than when the second board lamp lighting performance is not executed. Also, from the table shown in FIG. 36 and the table shown in FIG. The setting is such that the second edition lamp light emission effect is easier to execute than the light emission effect. As a result, it can be said that there is a higher possibility that the result of the look-ahead determination will be a big win in the first board lamp light effect than in the second board lamp light effect.

Also, from the explanation using the execution lottery table of the second edition lamp light emission effect shown in FIG. In this case, the second board lamp lighting performance is set to be executed more easily than when the result of the big win prefetch determination is 'big win' and the result of the big win pattern type prefetch determination is 'big win pattern Y'. As a result, the light emission of the second board lamp, which is a look-ahead effect, is greater in the case of controlling to the high-probability high base game state after the end of the jackpot game than in the case of controlling to the low-probability high base game state after the end of the jackpot game. It is set so that the performance can be easily executed.

Also, the result of the jackpot look-ahead judgment is "big hit", and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead judgment is "battle jackpot fluctuation 1", "battle jackpot fluctuation 2", "battle jackpot fluctuation 3", or "battle jackpot fluctuation 4" , the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is either "co-op big hit fluctuation 1", "co-op big hit fluctuation 2", "co-op big hit fluctuation 3", or "co-op big hit fluctuation 4". It is set to make it easier to execute the second edition lamp lighting effect than in some cases. That is, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the second board lamp light emission effect is executed, the special figure 1 related random number resulting from the execution of the second board lamp light emission effect is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. It can be said that the battle reach is more likely to be executed than the joint fight reach in the special figure fluctuation effect based on the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 determination process will be a big hit.

Next, the execution timing of the 1st board lamp lighting effect will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in the explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the first board lamp emission effect shown in FIG. 38, it is assumed that the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is two.

When the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is 2, the special figure 1 relation random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is the first area side Along with being shifted by one, the special figure 1 relation random number of the first area is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. As a result, it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process. 1)) is executed.

During the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((1) shown in FIG. 38), when the first start opening sensor 11a detects the entry of the game ball, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. As a result, the number of special figures 1 reserved is 2. After that, the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((1) shown in FIG. 38) ends.

When the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is 2, the special figure 1 relation random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is the first area side Along with being shifted by one, the special figure 1 relation random number of the first area is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. As a result, it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process. 2)) is executed.

In this embodiment, the first start opening sensor 11a detects the entry of the game ball during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((1) shown in FIG. 38), for example, the start winning command is "command 21", " Command 22", "Command 25", "Command 26", "Command 33", or "Command 35" If any command is set, special figure fluctuation effect (shown in FIG. 38 ( At the start of execution of 2)), the execution of the 1st board lamp lighting effect is started.

After that, even if the execution of the special figure variation effect ((2) shown in FIG. 38) ends, the execution of the first board lamp light emission effect will continue. After that, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((1) shown in FIG. 38), the first start opening sensor 11a detects the entry of the game ball and stores the special figure 1 related random number One on the first area side Along with being shifted, the special figure 1 related random numbers in the first area are cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. As a result, it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process, and based on the result of the determination, as shown in FIG. , "P25", "P26", "P33" or "P35" based on any special figure 1 variation pattern selected from ((3) shown in FIG. 38) is executed be.

At the same time as the N reach is started in the special figure fluctuation effect ((3) shown in FIG. 38), the execution of the first board lamp light emission effect ends. After that, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((3) shown in FIG. 38), either battle reach (see FIG. 47) or joint fight reach (see FIG. 48) can develop into SP reach. It is possible. After that, the execution of the special figure fluctuation production ends.

Next, the execution timing of the 2nd board lamp lighting effect will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in the explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the second board lamp light emitting effect shown in FIG.

When the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is 2, the special figure 1 relation random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is the first area side Along with being shifted by one, the special figure 1 relation random number of the first area is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. As a result, it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process. 1)) is executed.

During the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((1) shown in FIG. 39), when the first start opening sensor 11a detects the entry of the game ball, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, the number of special figures 1 reserved is in a state of two. After that, the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((1) shown in FIG. 39) ends.

When the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is 2, the special figure 1 relation random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is the first area side Along with being shifted by one, the special figure 1 relation random number of the first area is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. As a result, it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process. (2) shown in 39 is executed.

In this embodiment, the first start opening sensor 11a detects the entry of the game ball during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect ((1) shown in FIG. 39), for example, the start winning command is "command 21", " Command 22", "Command 25", "Command 26", "Command 33", or "Command 35". ), the execution of the 2nd board lamp lighting effect is started.

After that, even if the execution of the special figure variation effect ((2) shown in FIG. 39) ends, the execution of the second board lamp light emission effect will continue. After that, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation performance ((1) shown in FIG. 39), the special figure 1 related random number stored by detecting the entry of the game ball by the first start opening sensor 11a is one on the first area side. Along with being shifted, the special figure 1 related random numbers in the first area are cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. As a result, it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process, and based on the result of the determination, as shown in FIG. , "P25", "P26", "P33", or "P35", a special figure variation effect based on any special figure 1 variation pattern ((3) shown in FIG. 39) is executed.

At the same time as the N reach is started in the special figure fluctuation effect ((3) shown in FIG. 39), the execution of the second board lamp light emission effect ends. After that, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production ((3) shown in FIG. 39), either battle reach (see FIG. 47) or joint fight reach (see FIG. 48) can develop into SP reach. It is possible. After that, the execution of the special figure fluctuation production ends.

From the description using FIGS. 38 and 39, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, it is assumed that either the first board lamp lighting effect or the second board lamp lighting effect is executed. Also, the special figure 1 related random number due to the execution of the board lamp light emission effect is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure based on the result of determination whether or not it becomes a jackpot in the special figure 1 determination process During the execution of the figure fluctuation performance, the board lamp lighting performance continues to be executed until the execution of the N reach is started. Thus, when the execution of the board lamp light emission effect is started, the special figure 1 related random number resulting from the execution of the board lamp light emission effect is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the big hit in the special figure 1 determination process When the N reach is started in the special figure fluctuation production based on the result of the determination of whether or not, the production while exciting which SP reach will be developed out of the battle reach or the joint fight reach It is possible to play the game while looking forward to the development of the game.

36 to 37 described above, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the first board lamp emission effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 11. Then, the special figure 1 related random number caused by the execution of the first board lamp light emission effect is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the result of determination whether or not it becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process The expectation of a big hit is higher when it develops into a joint fight reach than when it develops into a battle reach with a special fluctuation effect based on it. On the other hand, based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11, the second board lamp light emission effect is executed, and the special figure 1 related random number resulting from the execution of the second board lamp light emission effect is special figure 1 It is cleared from the reservation storage unit 105a, and is developed into a battle reach than when it is developed into a joint fighting reach in a special figure variation production based on the result of determination of whether or not it becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process. In the case, the expectation of the jackpot is higher. As a result, based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 11, even if any one of the first board lamp lighting effect or the second board lamp lighting effect is executed, the board lamp is displayed. The special figure 1 related random number caused by the execution of the light emission production is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure variation production is based on the result of determining whether or not it will be a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process. It is possible to entertain the player by making the player interested in how the performance develops.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, from the tables shown in FIGS. In the case of "jackpot symbol X", the battle reach is more easily executed in the special figure fluctuation effect than in the case of "Y". As a result, the special figure 1 related random number caused by the execution of the second board lamp light emission effect is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the result of determination whether or not it becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process If it develops into a battle reach with a special figure fluctuation effect based on it, not only do you have expectations for the possibility of becoming a big hit, but also expect the possibility of moving to a high-probability high-base game state after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to have. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the board lamp light-emitting effect based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 11 and to enjoy the light-emitting effect.

7-6. Concrete Example of Board Lamp Light-Emitting Effect Next, a specific example of the first board lamp light-emitting effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, the first board lamp emission effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 40(A), a first left stamping ramp 54a, a second left stamping ramp 54b, a third left stamping ramp 54c, a left and right stamping ramp 54d, and a first right stamping ramp. 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, a sixth right beating ramp 54j, and a seventh In the state where the right hitting board lamp 54k is extinguished, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start hole 11, when the first board lamp lighting effect is executed, the process proceeds to FIG. 40(B). and proceed.

As shown in FIG. 40(B), when the 1st board lamp lighting effect is executed, the 7th right hitting board lamp 54k is first lit in blue. Subsequently, the seventh right hammering lamp 54k starts to turn blue, and as shown in FIG. The three board lamps of the left beating board lamp 54c and the left and right beating board lamps 54d are lit in blue. Starting from the blue lighting of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k, the first left hammer lamp 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, the third left hammer lamp 54c, and the left and right hammer lamps 54d. When the four board lamps 54 are lit in blue, the player who sees the display unit 50a is told that the blue light emission of the board lamps 54 is the first flow from the seventh right-hand hitting board lamp 54k centering on the display unit 50a. It is possible for the driver to grasp that the vehicle is proceeding clockwise toward the upper left of the road R1.

Subsequently, there are four plate lamps, a seventh right plate lamp 54k, a first left plate lamp 54a, a second left plate lamp 54b, a third left plate lamp 54c, and a left and right plate lamp 54d. 54 is lit in blue, as shown in FIG. Lamp 54 is illuminated in blue. A seventh right beating ramp 54k, a first left beating ramp 54a, a second left beating ramp 54b, a third left beating ramp 54c, a left and right beating ramp 54d, and a first right beating ramp 54e. Then, the second right beating board lamp 54f and the third right beating board lamp 54g are lit up in blue, so that the player who looks at the display section 50a sees the blue emission of the board lamp 54. It is possible to make it possible to grasp that it advances clockwise from the seventh right punching board ramp 54k to the upper right of the second flow path R2 centering on the portion 50a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40(E), a seventh right beating ramp 54k, a first left beating ramp 54a, a second left beating ramp 54b, a third left beating ramp 54c, and left and right beating ramps With the hammering lamp 54d, the first right hammering lamp 54e, the second right hammering lamp 54f, and the third right hammering lamp 54g illuminated in blue, the fourth right hammering lamp 54h and , a fifth right beating table lamp 54i and a sixth right beating table lamp 54j are illuminated in blue. A seventh right beating ramp 54k, a first left beating ramp 54a, a second left beating ramp 54b, a third left beating ramp 54c, a left and right beating ramp 54d, and a first right beating ramp 54e. , the second right-handling lamp 54f, the third right-handling lamp 54g, the fourth right-handling lamp 54h, the fifth right-handling lamp 54i, and the sixth right-handling lamp 54j light up in blue. As a result, the player who looks at the display portion 50a will notice that the blue light emission of the board lamp 54 is directed from the seventh right hitting board lamp 54k to the lower right of the second flow path R2 centering on the display portion 50a. It is possible to recognize that the blue light emitted from the board lamp 54 circles clockwise around the display portion 50a.

In the first board lamp light emission effect, as shown in FIG. 40 (E), the first left beating board lamp 54a, the second left beating board lamp 54b, the third left beating board lamp 54c, and the left and right beating board lamps 54d, a first right beating ramp 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, and a sixth The right hammer lamp 54j and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k are turned on, and the first left hammer lamp 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, and the third left hammer lamp 54c are turned on. , left and right punching table lamps 54d, a first right punching table lamp 54e, a second right punching table lamp 54f, a third right punching table lamp 54g, a fourth right punching table lamp 54h, and a fifth right punching table lamp. 54i, the sixth right stamping table lamp 54j, and the seventh right stamping table lamp 54k are extinguished. After that, the process returns to FIG. 40(A) again. The specific examples shown in FIGS. 40(A) to 40(E) are continuously carried out until the execution of the 1st edition lamp lighting effect is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the second board lamp lighting effect will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, the second board lamp lighting effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 41(A), a first left stamping ramp 54a, a second left stamping ramp 54b, a third left stamping ramp 54c, a left and right stamping ramp 54d, and a first right stamping ramp. 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, a sixth right beating ramp 54j, and a seventh With the right hitting board lamp 54k turned off, when the second board lamp light emitting effect is executed based on the game ball entering the first start hole 11, the flow advances to FIG. 41(B). .

As shown in FIG. 41(B), when the second board lamp lighting effect is executed, first the seventh right hitting board lamp 54k is lit in blue. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41(C), starting from the blue lighting of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k, the fourth right hammer lamp 54h, the fifth right hammer lamp 54i, and the sixth right hammer lamp 54h. The board lamp 54j is lit in blue. As shown in FIG. 41(C), the seventh right hammer lamp 54k, the fourth right hammer lamp 54h, the fifth right hammer lamp 54i, and the sixth right hammer lamp 54j are lit in blue. As a result, the player who looks at the display section 50a is told that the blue light emission of the board lamp 54 is centered on the display section 50a and moves counterclockwise from the seventh right striking board lamp 54k to the right of the second flow path R2. It is possible to grasp what is progressing around.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41(D), the seventh right beating ramp 54k, fourth right beating ramp 54h, fifth right beating ramp 54i, and sixth right beating ramp 54j are blue. , the first right hammer lamp 54e, the second right hammer lamp 54f, and the third right hammer lamp 54g are lit in blue. A seventh right-handling ramp 54k, a fourth right-handling ramp 54h, a fifth right-handling ramp 54i, a sixth right-handling ramp 54j, a first right-handling ramp 54e, and a second right-handling ramp. When the lamp 54f and the third right hitting board lamp 54g are lit in blue, the player who looks at the display part 50a will notice that the blue light emission of the board lamp 54 is emitted from the display part 50a to the second channel. It is possible to let the user know that the movement is progressing counterclockwise from the lower side of R2 toward the upper side of the display section 50a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41(E), a seventh right beating ramp 54k, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, a sixth right beating ramp 54j, and a With the first right hammering lamp 54e, the second right hammering lamp 54f, and the third right hammering lamp 54g illuminated in blue, the first left hammering lamp 54a and the second left hammering lamp 54a are turned on. 54b and the third left hammer lamp 54c are lit in blue. A seventh right-handling ramp 54k, a fourth right-handling ramp 54h, a fifth right-handling ramp 54i, a sixth right-handling ramp 54j, a first right-handling ramp 54e, and a second right-handling ramp. When the lamp 54f, the third right beating lamp 54g, the first left beating lamp 54a, the second left beating lamp 54b, and the third left beating lamp 54c are lit in blue (Fig. 41(E)), the player who looks at the display section 50a sees the blue light emission of the board lamp 54 from the seventh right beating board lamp 54k toward the lower left of the first flow path R1 with the display section 50a as the center. .

In the second board lamp light emission effect, as shown in FIG. 41 (E), the first left beating board lamp 54a, the second left beating board lamp 54b, the third left beating board lamp 54c, and the left and right beating board lamps 54d, a first right beating ramp 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, and a sixth The right hammer lamp 54j and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k are turned on, and the first left hammer lamp 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, and the third left hammer lamp 54c are turned on. , left and right punching table lamps 54d, a first right punching table lamp 54e, a second right punching table lamp 54f, a third right punching table lamp 54g, a fourth right punching table lamp 54h, and a fifth right punching table lamp. 54i, the sixth right stamping table lamp 54j, and the seventh right stamping table lamp 54k are extinguished. After that, the process returns to FIG. 41(A) again. The specific examples shown in FIGS. 41(A) to 41(E) are continued until the execution of the second board lamp lighting effect is completed.

7-7. Developed Challenge Production In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, after the end of the N reach in the special figure variation production, there is a case where the game develops into a cooperative reach or a battle reach through an advanced challenge production. The development challenge effect, which is a feature of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, will be described.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the N-reach is completed in the special figure variation performance and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting reach-loss on the display section 50a. In addition, an advanced challenge production may be executed. In the advanced challenge production, the first board movable body production using the board movable body 55k is executed. In the first on-board movable body presentation, the on-board movable body 55k for the player moves (downwards) downward (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) and temporarily stops step by step (see FIG. 42). . In the first on-board movable body presentation, the on-board movable body 55k moves (lowers) downward (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) and temporarily stops for the player in stages (Fig. 42). ), the display positions of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a are gradually moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko gaming machine PY1). That is, in the development challenge production, the on-board movable body 55k moves (downwards) downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) and temporarily stops in stages in the first on-board movable body production. As a result, the display positions of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display portion 50a are changed, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are gradually crushed by the on-board movable body 55k. It is a production like that.

In the development challenge production of the first embodiment, a success production that develops to SP reach of either battle reach or joint fight reach, or a success production to SP reach of either battle reach or joint fight reach It branches to a failure performance that does not lead to development (see FIGS. 45 and 46). The success effect in the development challenge effect functions as a effect suggesting to the player that the battle reach or the joint fight reach will develop into either the SP reach. The failure effect in the development challenge effect functions as a effect suggesting that either the battle reach or the joint fight reach will not develop into SP reach. Also, in the success effect in the advanced challenge effect, the first board upper movable body effect of the success mode is executed. On the other hand, in the failure presentation in the advanced challenge presentation, the first board top movable body presentation of the failure mode is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the operation of the on-board movable body 55k provided on the game board 1 in the first on-board movable body presentation will be described. By driving the motor to cause the on-board movable device 55 to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to move the on-board movable body 55k to an arbitrary position. Specifically, the upper board movable body 55k and the lower board movable body 56k operate as shown in FIG. It is held in a normal standby state (initial position).

After that, in the development challenge production, when the execution of the first board movable body production of the success mode or the failure mode is started, the drive source of the board movable device 55 is used as the first stage of the first board movable body production. is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k held in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. (below the machine PY1). After that, the on-board movable body 55k is temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. 42(B) and is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 42(B).

In the success mode or failure mode of the first board movable object presentation, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses in the state of being held at the operating position shown in FIG. As the second stage of the body effect, the on-board movable body 55k moves (falls) further downward along the front side of the display section 50a, and is temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. It is held in the operating position shown in 42(C).

When branching to the failure effect in the advanced challenge effect of the first embodiment, the first board top movable body effect of the failure mode is being executed. In the failure mode of the first board movable body presentation, the first board movable body presentation is performed even after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed while the player is held in the operating position shown in FIG. 42(C). , the on-board movable body 55k does not move (down) along the front side of the display section 50a further downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), failing mode. Execution of the first board top movable body presentation is completed. When the execution of the first board movable body effect is completed, the board movable body 55k returns to the initial position shown in FIG. When is completed, the execution of the development challenge production ends.

On the other hand, when branching to the success effect in the advanced challenge effect of the first embodiment, the first on-board movable object effect of the success mode is being executed. In the first board on-board movable body production of the successful mode, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses in the state of being held at the operating position shown in FIG. Developed in stages, the on-board movable body 55k moves (falls) along the front side of the display section 50a further downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko gaming machine PY1). Then, the on-board movable body 55k is temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. 42(D-2) and is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 42(D-2). After that, the execution of the first board movable body effect of the success mode ends, and the board movable body 55k returns to the initial position shown in FIG. 42(A). Execution of the challenge production ends.

Subsequently, the execution timing of the development challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production and the execution timing of the movable body production on the first board will be described with reference to FIG. First, using FIG. 43 (A), in the failure production in the development challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P38", the first board top movable body production of the failure mode is executed. A case will be described.

As shown in FIG. 43(A), the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P38" is started. After that, the execution of N reach is started in the special figure fluctuation effect, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach losing eyes on the display section 50a. After that, the execution of the advanced challenge production is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed after the execution of the advanced challenge production is started, the failure production in the advanced challenge production is executed, and the first board of the failure mode is executed. Execution of the movable body presentation is started. In the special figure variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P38", the execution of the first board on-board movable body production of the failure mode ends. Simultaneously with the end of execution of the first board on-board movable body presentation of the failure mode, the presentation symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a with the reach-losing eyes. Then, the execution of the failure performance in the development challenge performance ends, the execution of the development challenge performance ends, and the execution of the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P38" ends.

Next, using FIG. 43 (B), any one selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", "P24", "P27", "P28", "P34", or "P36" A case will be described in which the first board top movable body production of the success mode is executed in the success production in the development challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 43(B), execution of the special figure variation effect is started. After that, the execution of N reach is started in the special figure fluctuation effect, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach losing eyes on the display section 50a. After that, the execution of the advanced challenge performance is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed after the execution of the advanced challenge performance is started, the success performance in the advanced challenge performance is executed, and the first board of the success mode is performed. Execution of the upper movable body effect is started. In the special figure variation performance, the execution of the first board top movable body performance of the success mode ends, the execution of the success performance in the development challenge performance ends, and the execution of the development challenge performance ends. After that, it will develop into one of the SP reach, either the joint fight reach or the battle reach in the special figure fluctuation production.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, a specific example of the case where the development challenge effect is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect when the normal effect mode is set will be described. The specific examples shown in FIGS. 44 to 46 are the special figure 1 variation patterns "P23", "P24", "P27", "P28", "P34", "P36", or from "P38". It is a specific example when the development challenge production is executed in the special figure fluctuation production based on the selected special figure 1 fluctuation pattern.

When the normal production mode is set, when the execution of the special figure fluctuation production is started by the start of the variable display of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. When the display is started, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started. Further, as shown in FIG. 44A, the normal daytime background image G102 is displayed on the display section 50a. By displaying the normal daytime background image G102 on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the game is in the low-probability low-base game state.

When the normal performance mode is set, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same stop mode ("5.↓.5"), and reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small patterns KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 is continued. After that, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5.4.5") suggesting reach-losing on the display section 50a.

After that, proceed to the development challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production. When the advanced challenge effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 44(C), an advanced challenge effect image HC indicating "developed challenge" is displayed on the display section 50a. When the advanced challenge effect image HC is displayed on the display section 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the advanced challenge effect is being executed.

Then, execution of the first board top movable body presentation of the success mode or the failure mode in the advanced challenge presentation is started. When the first board movable body presentation of the success mode or the failure mode is executed, the board movable body held in the normal standby state (initial position) as the first stage of the first board movable body presentation 55k moves (falls) downward along the front side of the display section 50a and temporarily stops at the operating position shown in FIG. 44(D) (see FIG. 42(B)). The on-board movable body 55k held at the initial position moves (lowers) along the front side of the display section 50a downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), thereby causing the display section 50a to move downward. The production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 of the stop mode (“5, 4, 5”) suggesting a reach loss that is temporarily stopped and displayed at the display position shown in FIG. ) to reach the display position shown in FIG. 44(D). When the on-board movable body 55k held at the initial position moves (lowers) along the front side of the display section 50a for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) (Fig. 44 ( D)), the left effect symbol EZ1 in the normal symbol mode indicating the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a is in the symbol mode indicating the number "5" tilted leftward by about 10 degrees. The left effect symbol EZ1 is changed to the left effect symbol EZ1, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 in the normal symbol mode indicating the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a is also the number "4" tilted about 10 degrees to the right. The right production pattern EZ3 of the normal design mode showing the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a is also tilted about 10 degrees to the left. 5” is changed to the right production pattern EZ3 of the pattern mode showing the number.

Subsequently, in the first board movable body production of the success mode or the failure mode, the board movable body 55k held in the operating position shown in FIG. As an eye, it moves (descends) along the front side of the display unit 50a for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and the on-board movable body 55k operates as shown in FIG. 44(E). It temporarily stops at the position (see FIG. 42(C)). The on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 44(D) moves (lowers) along the front side of the display section 50a further downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko gaming machine PY1). As a result, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the stop mode ("5, 4, 5") suggesting reach-losing, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the display position shown in FIG. It progresses downward (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) and reaches the display position shown in FIG. 44(E). In addition, the board movable body 55k temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. 44(E)), the left effect symbol EZ1 in the symbol mode showing the number "5" tilted about 10 degrees to the left on the display unit 50a moves about 20 degrees to the left. is changed to a left effect pattern EZ1 in a pattern mode showing the number "5" tilted about 10 degrees; EZ2 is changed to the medium effect symbol EZ2 in which the number "4" is tilted to the right by about 20 degrees, and the right side of the design in which the number "5" is tilted to the right by about 10 degrees on the display section 50a. The production pattern EZ3 is changed to the right production pattern EZ3 in the pattern mode showing the number "5" tilted about 20 degrees to the right (see FIG. 44(E)).

If the special figure fluctuation production being executed is a special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P38", the failure production is executed in the development challenge production, and the movable body production on the first board in the failure mode is performed. It will be executed. When the failure effect is being executed in the advanced challenge effect, the final stage of the movable body effect on the first board does not proceed, and the execution of the movable body effect on the first board in the failure mode ends. From (E), proceed to FIG. 45(A). The on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. Return to position (see FIG. 45(A)). As shown in FIG. 45(A), on the display section 50a, a left effect symbol EZ1 in a pattern form showing the number "5" tilted leftward about 20 degrees, and "4" tilted rightward about 20 degrees. All of the middle production pattern EZ2 in the pattern mode showing the number of , and the right production pattern EZ3 in the pattern mode showing the number "5" tilted about 20 degrees to the right, are the production patterns EZ1 in the normal design mode showing numbers. ~ EZ3 returns to the stop mode ("5.4.5") suggesting reach loss. Further, when the failure effect is executed in the extended challenge effect, the character image CP1 of "failure" is displayed on the display section 50a. By displaying the character image CP1 of "Failure" on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the development challenge effect has failed and the game will not develop into SP reach.

After that, when the execution of the development challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production ends, the process proceeds from FIG. 45(A) to FIG. 45(B). As shown in FIG. 45(B), on the display section 50a, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the normal symbol mode are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5, 4, 5") suggesting reach-losing. In addition, the normal daytime background image G102 is displayed on the display unit 50a.

When the execution of the special figure fluctuation performance is completed, the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5 4 5") suggesting reach loss, and the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 also reach loss. are stopped all at once in a stop mode ("5, 4, 5") suggesting that.

On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation production being executed is the special figure 1 selected from among the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns "P23", "P24", "P27", "P28", "P34", or "P36" In the case of the special figure fluctuation production based on the fluctuation pattern, the success production is executed in the development challenge production.

When the success effect is being executed in the advanced challenge effect, the first board top movable body effect of the success mode is being executed. When the success effect is executed in the advanced challenge effect, the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. It further moves (falls) downward along the front side of 50a, and the on-board movable body 55k temporarily stops at the operating position shown in FIG. 46(A) (see FIG. 42(D-1)). . The on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. ), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the stop mode (“5, 4, 5”) suggesting reach loss, which is temporarily stopped and displayed at the display position shown in FIG. It advances and reaches the display position shown in FIG. 46(A). Further, the on-board movable body 55k, which has been temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. ), the left effect symbol EZ1 in the design mode showing the number "5" tilted leftward about 20 degrees on the display unit 50a is in the design mode showing the number "5" tilted leftward about 80 degrees. The middle production pattern EZ2 is changed to the left production pattern EZ1 and shows the number "4" tilted rightward by about 20 degrees on the display part 50a, and the number "4" tilted rightward by about 80 degrees. is changed to the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the symbol mode showing the , and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the symbol mode showing the number "5" tilted about 20 degrees to the right on the display part 50a is tilted about 80 degrees to the right It is changed to the right performance symbol EZ3 of the symbol mode showing the number "5" (see FIG. 46(A)).

In the success effect of the advanced challenge effect, when the execution of the first board top movable object effect of the success mode ends, the process proceeds from FIG. 46(A) to FIG. 46(B). The on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 46(A) moves (rises) upward along the front side of the display section 50a and returns to the initial position (FIG. 46(B)). , see FIG. 42(A)). As shown in FIG. 46(B), on the display unit 50a, a left effect symbol EZ1 in a symbol mode showing the number "5" tilted about 80 degrees to the left, and "5" tilted to the right about 80 degrees. The right production pattern EZ3 of the pattern mode showing the number of , returns to the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 of the normal pattern mode showing the number, and the variable display of the medium production pattern EZ2 is performed again, and the reach is formed. ("5.↓.5"). Further, when the success effect is executed in the advanced challenge effect, the character image CP2 of "success" is displayed on the display section 50a. By displaying the character image CP2 of "success" on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the special figure variation effect will develop into either the battle reach or the joint fight reach. It becomes possible.

After that, when the execution of the success production in the development challenge production ends and the execution of the development challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production ends, it will develop into battle reach or joint fighting reach in the special figure fluctuation production. .

7-8. SP Reach <Battle Reach>
A specific example of battle reach executed in a non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 47 . As shown in FIG. 47, in Battle Ready, first, an image or the like indicating that the main character and the enemy character will fight each other is displayed on the display section 50a (see FIG. 47(A)). An image showing that the main character and the enemy character are attacking and defending is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown), and an image showing that the main character is attacking the enemy character is displayed before the win-lose branch. is displayed on the display section 50a (see FIG. 47(B)).

When controlled in a non-time saving state, battle jackpot fluctuation 1 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P25", see FIG. 29), battle jackpot fluctuation 2 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P26", see FIG. 29), battle jackpot fluctuation 3 (special figure variation pattern “P27”, see FIG. 29), or battle jackpot variation 4 (special figure variation pattern “P28”, see FIG. 29), selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern is executed 47(B), a victory image (the main character (including an image of a happy character and a success background image G80) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with "double eyes" indicating that the jackpot has been won (FIG. 47). (C)). Then, the background image of the display unit 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in the "double eyes" (FIG. 47). (D)).

On the other hand, if it is controlled in a non-time saving state, to the battle loss variation 1 (special figure variation pattern "P35", see FIG. 29), or battle loss variation 2 (special figure variation pattern "P36", see FIG. 29) 47(B), after the production of FIG. 47(B), a failure production (losing production) indicating that the main character is defeated by the counter of the enemy character. The defeat image shown (including the image in which the main character is sad and the background image G81 for failure) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as "reach failure" suggesting failure. (See FIG. 47(E)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as the "reach-losing" (FIG. 47). (F)).
<Joint Reach>
Next, a specific example of joint fight reach executed in a non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 48 . In co-fight reach, an image indicating that the main character and the enemy character are about to fight is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown), and then, as shown in FIG. appears on the display unit 50a as reinforcements. Also, an image indicating that an ally character (horse) who is a companion of the main character has appeared as a reinforcement in the joint fight reach is displayed on the display section 50a. After that, an image in which the main character and the ally character cooperate to battle the enemy character is displayed on the display section 50a (not shown), and furthermore, the main character and the ally character both attack the enemy character. The image is displayed on the display section 50a (see FIG. 48(B)).

When it is controlled in a non-time-saving state, joint battle big hit fluctuation 1 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P21", see FIG. 29), joint fight big hit fluctuation 2 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P22", see FIG. 29), joint fight big hit fluctuation 3 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P23", see FIG. 29), or joint battle jackpot fluctuation 4 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P24", see FIG. 29), which is selected from among the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is executed In the case of a joint fighting reach, after the production of FIG. 48(B), a victory image (hero (including an image of a happy character and a background image G80 for success) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with "double eyes" indicating a big win (FIG. 48). (C)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as "double eyes" (FIG. 48). (D)).

On the other hand, when it is controlled in a non-time-saving state, the joint fighting loss fluctuation 1 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P33", see FIG. 29), or the joint fight loss fluctuation 2 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P34", see FIG. 29) 48(B), after the production of FIG. 48(B), as a failure production (losing production) suggesting a failure, it is shown that the main character has been defeated by the enemy character's counter. The defeat image shown (including the image in which the main character is sad and the background image G81 for failure) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed as "reach failure" suggesting failure. (See FIG. 48(E)). Then, the background image of the display unit 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as the "ready-to-miss" (FIG. 48). (F)).

<Story reach>
Next, a specific example of the story reach executed in the time saving state (low probability low base game state, high probability high base game state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in Story Reach, first, images showing the main character and heroine appearing in the story are displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 49(A)). The effect shown in FIG. 49(A) functions as an effect suggesting the start of story reach. Then, an image along the story is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 49(B)). The story reach of this form is a story in which the main character searches for the heroine.

When it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability low base game state, high probability high base game state), the story reach executed based on the story jackpot fluctuation 1 (special figure fluctuation pattern "P71", see FIG. 30) If so, after the production of FIG. 49 (B), as a success production (winning production) suggesting that the jackpot has been won, a success image showing that the heroine is happy (an image that the heroine is happy and background image G80 for success) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with "double eyes" suggesting a big win (FIG. 49(C)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as "double eyes" (FIG. 49). (D)). Note that the successful image shown in FIG. 49C is an image representing a story in which the main character and the heroine meet.

On the other hand, when it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability low base game state, high probability high base game state), it was executed based on the story loss variation 1 (special figure variation pattern "P73", see FIG. 30) If it is a story reach, after the production of FIG. background image G81) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with "ready-to-miss" suggesting a loss (FIG. 49(E)). Then, the background image of the display unit 50a returns to the daytime normal background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as the "ready-to-miss" (FIG. 49). (F)). Note that the failure image shown in FIG. 49E is an image representing a story in which the main character cannot meet the heroine.

In addition, when it is controlled to the time saving state (low probability low base game state, high probability high base game state), story jackpot variation 2 (special figure variation pattern "P72", see FIG. 30), or story loss variation 2 (Special figure fluctuation pattern "P74", see FIG. 30) If the story reach executed based on, after the production of FIG. A failure image indicating that the heroine is sad (including the image of the heroine being sad and the background image G81 for failure) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 suggest a failure "reach failure". A temporary stop is displayed at "eyes" (FIG. 49(E)). Then, the on-board movable body challenge effect is executed in the special figure variation effect, and the process proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG.

7-9. On-Board Movable Body Challenge Effect In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the story reach ends in the special figure variation effect and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting reach loss, It may proceed to the on-board movable body challenge production. The board movable body challenge performance, which is a feature of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, will be described.

When the story reach ends in the special figure variation effect and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display unit 50a in a stop mode suggesting a reach failure, the on-board movable body challenge effect is executed. may occur. In the on-board movable body challenge effect, a second on-board movable body effect using the on-board movable body 55k is executed. In the second on-board movable body presentation, the on-board movable body 55k moves downward (falls) and temporarily stops step by step (see FIG. 50). In the second on-board movable body production, the on-board movable body 55k moves downward (falls) and temporarily stops step by step (see FIG. 50). The display position of the effect symbol EZ2 is gradually moved downward for the player (that is, downward of the pachinko game machine PY1). That is, in the on-board movable body challenge effect, the on-board movable body 55k moves downward (falls) and temporarily stops step by step in the second on-board movable body effect. The display position of the middle effect symbol EZ2 being displayed is changed, and the effect is such that the middle effect symbol EZ2 is gradually crushed by the on-board movable body 55k.

The on-board movable body challenge effect of the first embodiment branches into a success effect suggesting a big win or a failure effect suggesting a loss (see FIGS. 53 and 54). The success effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect functions as a effect suggesting a big win to the player. The failure production in the development challenge production functions as a production that suggests a failure. In addition, in the success effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect, the second on-board movable body effect of the success mode is executed. On the other hand, in the failure effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect, the second on-board movable body effect of the failure mode is executed.

Next, the operation of the on-board movable body 55k provided on the game board 1 in the second on-board movable body presentation will be described with reference to FIG. In the second on-board movable body presentation, the on-board movable body 55k can be moved to an arbitrary position by driving the motor to cause the on-board movable device 55 to perform a predetermined operation. Specifically, until the execution of the second on-board movable body effect is started in the on-board movable body challenge effect, as shown in FIG. is held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which the is not operating.

After that, in the on-board movable body challenge performance, even if execution of the second on-board movable body performance is started in either mode of success or failure, the first stage of the second-board movable body representation is started. As a result, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k held in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. It moves downward (falls), is temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(B), and is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(B).

When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses while the operating position shown in FIG. Moving (descending) further downward along the front side of 50a, the on-board movable body 55k is temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(C) and held at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(C). It will be in a state where

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed while the operating position shown in FIG. Moving (descending) further downward along the front side of 50a, the on-board movable body 55k is temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(D) and held at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(D). It will be in a state where

When the second on-board movable body effect of the failure mode is being executed, even if a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses in the state of being held at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(D), It does not progress to the final stage of the second on-board movable body presentation, and the on-board movable body 55k does not move (fall) further downward along the front side of the display section 50a. When execution of the second on-board movable body effect in the failure mode is completed, the on-board movable body 55k returns to the initial position shown in FIG. Execution of the failure presentation in the movable body challenge presentation ends, and execution of the on-board movable body challenge presentation ends.

On the other hand, when the second on-board movable body effect of the success mode is executed in the on-board movable body challenge effect of the first embodiment, it is held in the operating position shown in FIG. 50(D). After a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as the final stage of the second on-board movable body presentation, the on-board movable body 55k moves (falls) further downward along the front side of the display section 50a. . Then, the on-board movable body 55k is temporarily stopped at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(E-2) and held at the operating position shown in FIG. 50(E-2). After that, the execution of the second on-board movable body effect of the success mode ends, and the on-board movable body 55k returns to the initial position shown in FIG. When the execution ends, the execution of the on-board movable body challenge effect ends.

Subsequently, the execution timing of the on-board movable body challenge performance and the execution timing of the second on-board movable body performance in the special figure fluctuation performance will be described with reference to FIG. First, using FIG. 51(A), the on-board movable body challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern "P74" will be described. As shown in FIG. 51(A), the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P74" is started. After that, the story reach is started in the special figure fluctuation production, and when the story reach ends, the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is temporarily stopped. Subsequently, execution of the on-board movable body challenge effect is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the execution of the on-board movable body challenge effect is started, a failure effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect is performed. Execution is executed, and the execution of the second board on-board movable body presentation of the failure mode is started. In the special figure variation production based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P74", the execution of the second board on-board movable body production of the failure mode ends. Simultaneously with the end of the execution of the second board on-board movable body production of the failure mode, the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 of the normal pattern mode in the stop mode (for example, "5, 4, 5") suggesting reach loss on the display part 50a. is temporarily stopped. When the execution of the failure effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect ends, the execution of the on-board movable body challenge effect ends, and the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P74" ends. .

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 51(B), the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72" will be described. As shown in FIG. 51(B), the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72" is started. After that, the story reach is started in the special figure fluctuation effect, and when the story reach is finished, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a reach loss on the display part 50a. After that, execution of the on-board movable body challenge performance is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the execution of the on-board movable body challenge performance is started, a successful performance in the on-board movable body challenge performance is executed. Then, execution of the second board top movable body presentation of the success mode is started. In the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72", the execution of the second board on-board movable body presentation of the success mode ends. Simultaneously with the end of execution of the second board top movable body production of the success mode, the production symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win on the display section 50a. When the execution of the success effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect ends, the execution of the on-board movable body challenge effect ends, and the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72" ends. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, in the special figure variation production executed when the variable probability production mode is set, a specific example when the on-board movable body challenge production is executed will be described. In addition, the specific example shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is a specific example when the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72" or "P74" is executed.

When the probability variable performance mode is set, the execution of the special figure variable performance is started by the start of the variable display of the special figure 2. When the execution of the special figure variation performance is started, the variation display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started. After that, it will develop into a story reach with a special variable production.

When the story reach ends, as shown in FIG. 52(A), a failure image (including the heroine's image of sadness and the failure background image G81) showing that the heroine is sad is displayed on the display unit 50a. At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed with "ready to lose" suggesting a loss.

After that, in the special figure fluctuation production, proceed to the board movable body challenge production. When the on-board movable body challenge effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the on-board movable body challenge effect image BC indicating "on-board movable body challenge" is displayed on the display section 50a. When the on-board movable body challenge effect image BC is displayed on the display section 50a, it is possible for the player to grasp that the on-board movable body challenge effect has started.

Then, in the on-board movable body challenge presentation, execution of the second on-board movable body presentation of the success mode or the failure mode is started. When the second board movable body presentation of the success mode or the failure mode is executed, the board movable body held in the normal standby state (initial position) as the first stage of the second board movable body presentation 55k (see FIG. 50(A)) moves (falls) downward along the front side of the display section 50a and temporarily stops at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(C) (see FIG. 50 ( B)). Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the medium effect symbol EZ2 in the normal symbol mode indicating the number "4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display section 50a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 in the normal symbol mode showing the number "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed small in the upper left corner of the display section 50a, and the number "5" is displayed. A right effect symbol EZ3 in the normal symbol mode shown is temporarily stopped and displayed in a small size in the upper left part of the display section 50a.

Subsequently, as the second step of the second stage of the success mode or failure mode of the second on-board movable body presentation, the on-board movable body 55k held in the operating position shown in FIG. 52(D), and temporarily stops at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(D). When the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(C) is moved (lowered) along the front side of the display section 50a toward the operating position shown in FIG. 50(C)), the medium effect symbol EZ2 also progresses downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) in the display section 50a, and reaches the display position shown in FIG. 52(D). be. Further, the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(C) is moved (lowered) toward the operating position shown in FIG. 52(D) along the front side of the display section 50a. Then (see FIG. 50(C)), the medium effect symbol EZ2 in the normal symbol mode showing the number "4" on the display section 50a moves about 40 to the right as if it were crushed by the on-board movable body 55k. It is changed to a medium effect symbol EZ2 in a symbol mode showing a number "4" which is tilted and reduced, and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, as the third stage of the second on-board movable body presentation of the success mode or the failure mode, the on-board movable body 55k held in the operating position shown in FIG. 52(E), and temporarily stops at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(E). When the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(D) moves (lowers) along the front side of the display section 50a toward the operating position shown in FIG. (See FIG. 50(D)), the medium effect symbol EZ2 also progresses downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko gaming machine PY1) on the display portion 50a, and reaches the display position shown in FIG. 52(E). be done. Further, the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(D) is moved (lowered) toward the operating position shown in FIG. 52(E) along the front side of the display section 50a. Then (see FIG. 50(D)), the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is tilted about 40 degrees to the right on the display unit 50a and shows a reduced number "4", is displayed about 50 degrees to the right. It is changed to a medium effect symbol EZ2 in a symbol mode showing a number "4" which is tilted and reduced, and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

If the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern "P74" is executed, the failure production in the on-board movable body challenge production is executed, so from FIG. 52 (E) to FIG. 53 (A) and proceed. On the other hand, when the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72" is executed, the success effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect is executed, so from FIG. 52 (E) to FIG. 54 ( Go to A).

First, in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern "P74", the case where the failure production is executed in the on-board movable body challenge production will be described with reference to FIG. In the board movable body challenge performance in the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P74", when the failure performance is executed, the second board movable body performance of the failure mode is executed. . In the second on-board movable body production of the failure mode, the on-board movable body 55k is held at the operating position shown in FIG. The body 55k does not move (fall) along the front side of the display section 50a downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and the execution of the first board top movable body presentation of the failure mode ends. becomes. In this case, the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. return to the initial position. As shown in FIG. 53(A), the middle effect symbol EZ2 in the symbol mode showing the number "4" which is tilted about 50 degrees to the right and which is reduced is the normal symbol mode showing the number "4". It returns to the medium effect symbol EZ2 of , and is temporarily stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 53(A), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a in a stop mode ("5, 4, 5") suggesting reach loss.

When the execution of the failure effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect ends in the special figure variation effect and the execution of the on-board movable body challenge effect ends, the process proceeds from FIG. 53(A) to FIG. 53(B). The left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper right of the display portion 50a are moved to the center of the display portion 50a, as shown in FIG. 53(B). 2, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5.4.5") suggesting reach-losing. In addition, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display unit 50a. By displaying the probability variation background image G105 on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the high-probability high-base game state is being controlled.

When the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern "P74" is completed, as shown in FIG. ), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped all at once in a stop mode ("5.4.5") suggesting reach-losing.

Next, in the special figure variation production based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72", the case where the success production is executed in the on-board movable body challenge production will be described with reference to FIG. In the board movable body challenge production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern "P72", when the success production is executed, the second board movable body production of the success mode is executed. become.

In the special figure variation production based on the special figure 2 variation pattern "P72", when the second board upper movable body production of the successful mode is executed, as the final stage of the second board upper movable body production, Fig. 52 The on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in (E) moves (falls) further downward along the front side of the display section 50a, and temporarily stops at the operating position shown in FIG. 54(A). will do. When the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(E) moves (lowers) along the front side of the display section 50a toward the operating position shown in FIG. 50 (E-2)), the medium effect symbol EZ2 also progresses downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko machine PY1) on the display section 50a, and reaches the operating position shown in FIG. 54(A). is reached. Further, the on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 52(E) is moved (lowered) toward the operating position shown in FIG. 54(A) along the front side of the display section 50a. And (see FIG. 50 (E-2)), the medium effect symbol EZ2 in the symbol mode showing the number "4", which is tilted about 50 degrees to the right on the display unit 50a and is reduced, is displayed to the right. It is changed to a medium effect symbol EZ2 of a symbol mode showing a reduced number "4" which is tilted by about 90 degrees, and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(B), a design mode showing a reduced number "4" which is tilted about 90 degrees to the right and has been temporarily stopped displayed at the bottom of the display section 50a. The medium effect pattern EZ2 disappears. Then, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5.5.5") suggesting a big win. When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5.5.5") suggesting a big win, the execution of the second board top movable body performance of the success mode ends, and FIG. 54(B). The on-board movable body 55k held at the operating position shown in FIG. 50 (A), (A )reference).

When the execution of the success effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect ends in the special figure variation effect and the execution of the on-board movable body challenge effect ends, the process proceeds from FIG. 54(C) to FIG. 54(D). The left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper right of the display portion 50a are moved to the center of the display portion 50a, as shown in FIG. 54(D). At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5.5.5") suggesting a big win. In addition, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display unit 50a. By displaying the probability variation background image G105 on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to grasp that the game is controlled to the high-probability high-base game state.

When the execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 54(E), the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5.5.5") suggesting a big hit. , small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5.5.5") suggesting a big win.

8. Effect Control by Effect Control Microcomputer 121 of First Embodiment Next, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 121 of the present embodiment (first embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57 .

[1. Receive command analysis processing]
First, the received command analysis processing (S4105) of this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 55, in the received command analysis process (S4105), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 received the starting winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) from the main control board 100 It is determined whether or not (S4301), and if it has been received, the later-described start winning process (S4302) is performed.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command or special figure 2 fluctuation start command) is received from the main control board 100 (S4303), For example, a variation production start process, which will be described later, is performed (S4304).

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 100 (S4305), and if received, performs fluctuation production end processing (S4306). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4306), the production control microcomputer 121 terminates the special figure fluctuation production (stops the fluctuation display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3, and performs stop display).

Production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the fluctuation production end processing (S4306), and appropriately ends the special figure fluctuation production based on the analysis result (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns Set the special figure fluctuation production end command for stopping the fluctuation display of KZ1 to KZ3 to the output buffer of the RAM 124 for production. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, it ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 100 (S4307), and if received, performs an opening effect selection process (S4308). In the opening effect selection process (S4308), the opening command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting the opening performance in the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round game command is received from the main control board 100 (S4309), and if received, performs a round effect selection process (S4310). In the round effect selection process (S4310), the round game command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect in the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 100 (S4311), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process (S4312). In the ending effect selection process (S4312), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command, and selects the pattern (contents) of the jackpot ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game based on the analysis result. Then, a big win ending effect start command for starting the ending effect in the selected big win ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs other processes (S4313) based on received commands other than the above commands (for example, processes for performing effects associated with variable display of normal symbols). Then, the received command analysis processing (S4105) ends.

[2. Start Winning Process]
First, in the starting prize winning process (S4302) of the first embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 56, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores the starting winning command reserve storage section of the effect RAM 124 (S4401). Specifically, if the received command is the first start prize winning command, it is stored in the first start prize winning command reserve storage unit, and if the received command is the second start prize winning command, the second start prize winning command reserve storage unit is stored. memorize to Note that the starting winning command is stored in the lowest numbered storage area in which the command is not stored among the first to fourth storage areas in each starting winning command reserve storage section. Thereby, the start winning command is stored in the order corresponding to the storage order of the special figure reservation.

After step S4401, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the value of the first special figure pending effect counter provided in the effect RAM 124 to "1" if the starting winning command stored in step S4401 is the first starting winning command. Add and update, and if it is the second start winning command, add "1" to the value of the second special figure reservation effect counter provided in the effect RAM 124 and update (S4402). In addition, the first special figure reservation effect counter is a counter on the effect control side (sub control board 120 side) for calculating the number of first special figure reservations. Similarly, the 2nd special figure reservation production counter is the counter of the production control side which calculates the number of the 2nd special figure reservation.

After step S4402, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs pre-reading determination including whether or not the jackpot is won based on the start winning command stored in step S4403 and the table shown in FIG. 33 (S4403). In the look-ahead judgment, in addition to the propriety of the big win, the type of the big win pattern (big win pattern X, big win pattern Y, big win pattern Z), the length of the fluctuation time, presence or absence of reach, contents of the special figure fluctuation performance, etc. are judged.

After step S4403, in the first board lamp light emission effect selection process (S4404), the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the result of the pre-reading determination in step S4403, the information included in the start winning command stored in step S4401, and the Based on the table shown in 36, it is selected whether or not to execute the first board lamp light emitting effect using the first board lamp light emitting effect lottery random number from "0" to "99". In step S4403, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the first board lamp light effect start command to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 when the execution of the first board lamp light effect is selected. As a result, the first board lamp light emission effect is executed according to the content of the pre-reading effect indicated by the first board lamp light emission effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140, and the seventh right hand hitting board is executed via the lamp control circuit 151. Light emission from the lamp 54k → light emission from the first left hammer lamp 54a, light emission from the second left hammer lamp 54b, light emission from the third left hammer lamp 54c and light emission from the left and right hammer lamp 54d → first right hammer lamp 54e. , the second right beating lamp 54f and the third right beating lamp 54g → the fourth right beating lamp 54h and the fifth right beating lamp 54i and the sixth right beating lamp 54j are emitted in the order of emission (see FIG. 40). Thus, when the seventh right hitting board lamp 54k is illuminated, the player watching the game board 1 is informed that the light emission of the board lamp 54 is progressing clockwise around the display section 50a. , it is possible to suggest a jackpot expectation.

Subsequently, in the second board lamp light emission effect selection process (S4405), the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the result of the pre-reading determination in step S4403, the information included in the start winning command stored in step S4401, and the Based on the information for selecting whether or not to execute the 1st edition lamp lighting effect and the table shown in FIG. Select whether or not to execute the 2nd lamp lighting effect. Further, in step S4404, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a second board lamp light effect start command to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 when execution of the second board lamp light effect is selected. As a result, the second board lamp light emission effect is executed according to the content of the pre-reading effect indicated by the second board lamp light emission effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140, and the seventh right hand hitting board via the lamp control circuit 151. Light emission from the lamp 54k → light emission from the sixth right-hand lathe lamp 54j, light emission from the fifth right-hand ladle lamp 54i and light emission from the fourth right-hand ladle lamp 54h → light emission from the third right-hand ladle lamp 54g and the second right-hand ladle lamp 54h. Light emission from the lamp 54f and light emission from the first right hammer lamp 54e→Light emission from the left and right hammer lamp 54d, light emission from the third left hammer lamp 54c, light emission from the second left hammer lamp 54b and light emission from the first left hammer lamp 54a. are emitted in the order of emission (see FIG. 41). Thus, when the seventh right hitting board lamp 54k is illuminated, the player looking at the game board 1 is informed that the light emission of the board lamp 54 is progressing counterclockwise around the display portion 50a. At the same time, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.

Subsequently, in step S4406, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute another look-ahead effect. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute another prefetch effect (YES in S4406), it determines execution of another prefetch effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit (S4407), and sends a prefetch start command to the effect RAM 124. is set in the output buffer of (S4408). Note that other look-ahead effects include a pending icon change effect that changes the display mode of the pending icon HA, a continuous advance notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols, and the like.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 outputs a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display section 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the content of the prefetch effect indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect. Sound is output from the speaker 52 through the circuit 161 (performs the prefetching effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted through the lamp control circuit 151 (performs the prefetching effect by light emission), and the board is movable. It is possible to operate the body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k (execute the look-ahead effect by motion).

[3. Fluctuation production start processing]
As shown in FIG. 57, in the fluctuation production start process (S4304) of the first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (S4501). The variation start command includes information on variation patterns (FIGS. 11, 12, 29, and 30) and information on special figure stop design data based on determination of big hits and the like.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the effect symbol EZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect (S4502). Specifically, along with obtaining a random number for determining the production pattern, one table is selected based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command from among a plurality of tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach, and the selection A performance symbol is selected by determining the acquired performance symbol determination random number using the table. As a result, a combination (for example, "7, 7, 7", etc.) of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to be finally stopped and displayed is determined. Incidentally, the production control microcomputer 121 is also performing selection of the small symbol KZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation production in the fluctuation production start process (S4304). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires a small symbol determination random number, selects one table based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, and uses the selected table to obtain the acquired small symbol. A small pattern is selected by judging the random number for design determination. As a result, the combination of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that are finally stopped and displayed (for example, "7.7.7") is determined.

Subsequently, in the sub-variation pattern selection process (S4503), the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the set effect mode and the variation start command, and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect are associated. Select a sub-variation pattern determination table for performing sub-variation pattern determination for determining the sub-variation pattern obtained. A plurality of sub-variation pattern determination tables are provided in association with the production mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one sub-variation pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each sub-variation pattern determination table, a random number value for sub-variation pattern determination (sub-variation pattern determination value) is distributed to one or more sub-variation patterns so as to have a predetermined allocation rate (%). . Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the sub-variation pattern determination random number counter as a sub-variation pattern determination random number, and performs sub-variation pattern determination based on the acquired sub-variation pattern determination random number. In addition, the sub-variation pattern determination random number takes a value in the range from "0" to "99".

Production control microcomputer 121, in the sub-fluctuation pattern determination, collates the acquired sub-fluctuation pattern determination random number with the selected sub-fluctuation pattern table, determines the sub-fluctuation pattern, and data representing the determined sub-fluctuation pattern. It is set in the RAM 124 for presentation. It should be noted that once the special figure fluctuation production pattern is determined, the time of the fluctuation production, the fluctuation display mode of the production pattern, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win production, the contents of the ready-to-win production, the execution or non-execution of the development challenge production, the execution timing of the development challenge production (see FIG. 43) , content of the development challenge production (Fig. 44, failure production in the development challenge production (see Fig. 45 (A)), success production in the development challenge production (see Fig. 46)), execution or non-execution of the movable body production on the first board, the Contents of the movable body production on the first board (contents of the movable body production on the first board in the failure mode (see FIGS. 42(A) to 42(C), 42(D-1), 44, and 45), Contents of the movable body production on the first board of the successful mode (see FIGS. 42 (A) to 42 (C), FIG. 42 (D-2), FIG. 44, and FIG. 46)), the movable body production on the first board Execution timing (execution timing of the first board movable body effect in the failure mode (see FIG. 43A), execution timing of the first board movable body effect in the success mode (see FIG. 43B)), on board Execution/non-execution of movable body challenge production, execution timing of on-board movable body challenge production (see FIG. 51), content of on-board movable body challenge production (FIG. 52, failure production in on-board movable body challenge production (FIG. 53 (A) See), success effect in board movable body challenge effect (see FIGS. 54(A), 54(B), and 54(C))), execution/non-execution of second board movable body effect, second board movable body effect Contents of body production (failure mode second board upper movable body production (see FIGS. 50 (A) to 50 (D), FIG. 50 (E-1), FIG. 52, and FIG. 53), success mode second board Upper movable body effect (see FIGS. 50(A) to 50(D), FIG. 50(E-2), FIG. 52, and FIG. 54)), second board upper movable body effect execution timing (second failure mode Execution timing of the on-board movable body effect (see FIG. 51(A)), execution timing of the second on-board movable body effect of the success mode (see FIG. 51(B))), presence/absence of the operation effect, details of the operation effect, The details of the contents of the special figure fluctuation production consisting of the production development configuration, the type of the background of the production pattern, etc. will be decided.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a notice effect (S4504). Specifically, while acquiring a random number for determining the advance notice effect, one table is selected from among a plurality of tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, and the selection A notice effect is selected by determining the obtained random number for deciding the notice effect by using the obtained table. As a result, the content of the notice effect such as a so-called step-up notice effect or a chance-up notice effect is determined.

As an example of the notice effect, a dialogue notice in a gold frame that indicates that the expectation for winning a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is high, a dialogue notice in a green frame that indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium, and a jackpot Examples include dialogue notices in blue frames that indicate that expectations are lower than these. In other words, the advance notice effect is a effect that indicates the player's expectation of winning before the final notification of winning or losing by means of the effect symbol EZ.

Following S4504, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a variable effect start command for starting the variable effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 based on the selected effect pattern, sub-variation pattern and advance notice effect. (S4511), this processing ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4511 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the special symbol variable effect synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol is started on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in addition to the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation production start command includes the special figure fluctuation production by the sound output from the speaker 52, the special figure by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53 The contents of the effect of the figure variation effect and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect by the action performed by the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k are included.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, while the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure fluctuation production contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation production start command transmitted to the image control board 140 In response, output the sound from the speaker 52 through the voice control circuit 161 (execute the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound), and emit light the frame lamp 53 through the lamp control circuit 151 (special figure by light emission (Performs a variation effect), and activates the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k (performs a special figure variation effect by action).

The production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment reaches the timing shown in FIG. (including the failure effect in ). In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment reaches the timing shown in FIG. The on-board movable body 55k is operated at the same time when execution of the on-board movable body performance is started. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, any of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P23", "P24", "P27", "P28", "P34", or "P36" Even if it is a special figure fluctuation production based on the FIG. 1 fluctuation pattern, when the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B) is reached during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production, the development challenge production (including the success production in the development challenge production) to start. Production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", "P24", "P27", "P28", "P34", or "P36", which special figure 1 variation Even if it is a special figure fluctuation production based on a pattern, when the timing shown in FIG. The upper movable body 55k is operated.

The production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment reaches the timing shown in FIG. including the failure effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect). The production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment reaches the timing shown in FIG. At the same time when execution of the movable body performance is started, the on-board movable body 55k is operated. On the other hand, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment reaches the timing shown in FIG. Execution of the challenge effect (including the success effect in the on-board movable body challenge effect) is started. The production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment reaches the timing shown in FIG. At the same time when execution of the movable body performance is started, the on-board movable body 55k is operated.

9. Effects of the First Embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the game board 1 has the first left beating board lamp 54a, the sixth right beating board lamp 54j, and the 7 and the right hammering ramp 54k are provided at different positions. Starting from the lighting of the seventh right beating lamp 54k, the first left beating lamp 54a and the sixth right beating lamp 54j are illuminated, and the first and second lamp lighting effects are performed. , is a look-ahead that suggests the possibility that the result of look-ahead determination will be a big hit. Thus, when the seventh right beating board lamp 54k is turned on, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the seventh right beating board lamp 54k and to make the player interested in the board lamp lighting effect being executed, thereby playing the game. It is possible to improve interest.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, starting from the lighting of the seventh right striking board lamp 54k, which board of the first board lamp light emission effect or the second board lamp light emission effect It is possible to have expectations about whether the lamp lighting effect will be executed. As a result, when the seventh right hitting board lamp 54k is turned on, it is possible to make the player's interest in the board lamp light emitting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the first board lamp light emitting effect is executed, the first left beating board lamp 54a is lit starting from the lighting of the seventh right beating board lamp 54k, Finally, the sixth right hammering table lamp 54j is lit. On the other hand, when the 2nd round lamp lighting effect, which suggests that the result of the look-ahead judgment is more likely to be a big win than the 1st round lamp lighting effect, is executed, the lighting of the seventh right hitting board lamp 54k is started. Then, the sixth right beating table lamp 54j is lit, and finally the first left beating table lamp 54a is lit. As a result, when the seventh right beating board lamp 54k is turned on, attention is paid to which board lamp light-emitting effect is executed, out of the first board lamp light-emitting effect or the second board lamp light-emitting effect. , it becomes possible to excite the player.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the first left hammer lamp 54a is lit starting from the lighting of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k in the first board lamp light emission effect, and finally the sixth lamp. The right beating plate lamp 54j is lit. On the other hand, when the second board lamp lighting effect is executed, the seventh right board lamp 54k is turned on, the sixth right board lamp 54j is turned on, and finally the first left board lamp 54a is turned on. be. As a result, after the seventh right beating lamp 54k is turned on, attention is paid to which one of the sixth right beating lamp 54j or the first left beating lamp 54a is to be illuminated next. It is possible to make the player's heart beat faster.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the seventh right striking board lamp 54k is illuminated in the first board lamp light emitting effect, the light emission of the board lamp 54 rotates clockwise around the display section 50a. will proceed to On the other hand, in the second board lamp lighting effect, when the seventh right striking board lamp 54k is illuminated, the light emission of the board lamp 54 progresses counterclockwise around the display section 50a. As a result, depending on whether the light emission of the board lamp 54 progresses clockwise or counterclockwise, which board lamp light-emitting effect is being executed among the first board lamp light-emitting effect and the second board lamp light-emitting effect. It is possible to make it easy to grasp whether.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the seventh right beating table lamp 54k, the first left beating table lamp 54a and the sixth right beating table lamp 54j are arranged around the display unit 50a of the image display device 50. is provided. As a result, the seventh right beating board lamp 54k, the first left beating board lamp 54a and the sixth right beating board lamp 54j emit light to the player who is watching the effect image displayed on the display section 50a. It is possible to make the player interested in the lamp light emission effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11, which board lamp out of the first board lamp light emission effect or the second board lamp light emission effect A lighting effect is also executed. As a result, the game ball enters the first starting port 11, the seventh right hitting board lamp 54k is lit, and whether or not the board lamp light emitting effect is executed, the first board lamp light emitting effect or the second board It is possible to amuse the player by making him/her pay attention to which board lamp light emitting effect is executed among the lamp light emitting effects.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the sixth The possibility that the result of the prefetch determination will be a big win is higher when the second board lamp light-emitting effect in which the right beating board lamp 54j and the first left beating board lamp 54a are illuminated is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the second board lamp lighting effect is executed rather than the first board lamp lighting effect as the look-ahead effect. On the other hand, in the case where the first board lamp light emitting effect is executed and develops into a joint fighting reach during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the second board lamp light emitting effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation effect is executed. It is more likely that the result of the jackpot judgment will be a jackpot than when it develops into a joint struggle reach. As a result, even if the 1st edition lamp lighting production is executed as a look-ahead production, if it can develop into a joint fighting reach during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production after that, the 2nd edition lamp lighting production is executed and becomes a joint fighting reach It is possible to have expectations for the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination will be a jackpot more than in the case of development. Therefore, depending on whether or not the first board lamp light emitting effect or the second board lamp light emitting effect is executed, and the development to the joint fight reach, the special after the look-ahead effect is executed. It is possible to entertain the figure variation effect.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the first board lamp light emission effect is executed in which the first left beating board lamp 54a is illuminated, and finally the sixth right beating board lamp 54j is illuminated. The result of the look-ahead determination is a big win when the second-board lamp light-emitting effect is executed in which the sixth right-hand beating board lamp 54j is illuminated and finally the first left-hand beating board lamp 54a is illuminated. likely to become As a result, it is possible to make the player look forward to which one of the first left hammering lamp 54a and the sixth right hammering lamp 54j emits light. Therefore, depending on the order in which the board lamps 54 are illuminated and whether or not the cooperative reach is executed, it is possible to amuse the player and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the first board lamp light emitting effect is executed, it is exciting whether or not it will develop into a joint fight reach in the special figure fluctuation effect after that. , When the 2nd board lamp light emission effect is executed, it is possible to make the heart pound whether or not it develops into a battle reach in the special figure variation effect after that. As a result, as a look-ahead effect, depending on whether or not the first board lamp light emitting effect or the second board lamp light emitting effect is executed, the SP reach that develops in the special figure fluctuation effect It is possible to make the player feel excited and entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the second board lamp light emission effect is executed, the expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the cooperative reach, but after the big win game is over, the high probability high base game It is possible to pay attention to whether or not it develops into a special figure fluctuation production to a battle reach that is highly likely to be controlled by the state. As a result, when the 2nd edition lamp lighting effect is executed as a look-ahead effect, it is possible to entertain the game by giving a sense of expectation that the special figure fluctuation effect will develop into a battle reach. becomes.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the first left beating table lamp 54a and the sixth right beating table lamp 54j are provided around the display section 50a of the image display device 50. FIG. As a result, after drawing attention to the board lamp light-emitting effect (first board lamp light-emitting effect, second board lamp light-emitting effect) in which the first left beating board lamp 54a and the sixth right beating board lamp 54j are used, the image display device 50 It is possible to make it easier to draw attention to whether or not the SP reach is executed on the display section 50a.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in the first board lamp light emission effect and the second board lamp light emission effect, the lighting color of the first left beating board lamp 54a and the lighting color of the sixth right beating board lamp 54j The lighting color is the same (blue). As a result, the first left beating lamp 54a and the sixth right beating lamp 54j are blue in any one of the first board lamp light emitting effect and the second board lamp light emitting effect. By turning on, the player can easily understand that the first left hammering lamp 54a and the sixth right hammering lamp 54j are involved in the board lamp light emitting effect.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the first on-board movable body effect is executed in the development challenge effect, the on-board movable body 55k moves to the front side of the display section 50a of the image display device 50. , the display positions of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a are changed for the player from the initial position (that is, below the pachinko gaming machine PY1). It is moved downward (that is, below the pachinko machine PY1). As a result, the display positions of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are changed in accordance with the movement of the on-board movable body 55k, and by making it look as if the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are crushed, a surprise is created. It becomes possible to give and entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the first board movable body effect is executed, and the display position on the display unit 50a is changed along with the movement of the board movable body 55k. The number of EZ is greater than the number of performance symbols EZ whose display positions on the display section 50a are changed as the second on-board movable body performance is executed and the on-board movable body 55k moves. As a result, it is possible to amuse the player by giving visual interest that the number of the performance symbols EZ whose display position is changed on the display section 50a is different depending on the on-board movable body performance to be executed. becomes.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the first board movable body presentation of the success mode is executed, the board movable body 55k is moved and temporarily stopped in three stages, and the board movable body 55k is moved and temporarily stopped. Body 55k reaches the operating position shown in FIG. 46(A). As the board movable body 55k moves and temporarily stops in three steps, the display positions of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a also move downward for the player (that is, the pachinko game machine PY1) to reach the display position shown in FIG. 46(A). As a result, in the first on-board movable body performance, the player is made to pay attention to which operating position the on-board movable body 55k is moved and to which display position the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are moved. can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the first board movable body presentation of the success mode is executed, the board movable body 55k is moved and temporarily stopped in three stages, and the board movable body 55k is moved and temporarily stopped. Body 55k reaches the operating position shown in FIG. 46(A). As the movement and temporary stop of the on-board movable body 55k are performed in three stages, the display positions of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a are also changed to those shown in FIG. The indicated display position is reached. Then, it will be developed into one of the SP reach of the battle reach or the joint fight reach in the special figure fluctuation production. As a result, the movable body 55k on the board reaches the display position shown in FIG. It is possible to play a game while making the action of the on-board movable body 55k in the upper movable body presentation exciting.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a are displayed by the on-board movable body 55k moved to the first on-board movable body effect. is changed, and the design patterns of the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are changed to tilted pattern patterns. Thus, in the first board movable body effect, not only the display positions of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 on the display section 50a but also the inclinations of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 change due to the movement of the on-board movable body 55k. It will be done. Therefore, the movement of the on-board movable body 55k in the first on-board movable body presentation makes it easier for the player to grasp the changes in the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, thereby making it possible to entertain the player more.

10. Modification Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. In addition, technical features in the above-described first embodiment and modifications below can be deleted as appropriate if they are not described as essential in this specification.

In the above-described first embodiment, the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 corresponds to "establishment of a predetermined condition", but is limited to this. never. For example, provided with another start port different from the first start port 11 and the second start port 12, the game to any start port out of the first start port 11, the second start port 12, or the other start port Winning a ball (winning a ball) may correspond to 'satisfaction of a predetermined condition'. It should be noted that the winning of a game ball to another starting port may trigger the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (big hit lottery, ie acquisition and determination of big hit random numbers, etc.).

Although the jackpot game state of the first embodiment corresponds to the "special game state", it is not limited to this. The jackpot game state and other game states may correspond to the "special game state". Also, the jackpot game state or other game state may correspond to the "special game state". Here, the other game state may be any one of a high-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, or a low-probability high-base game state. Further, the other game state may be two game states out of a high-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, or a low-probability high-base game state. In addition, other game states may be a high-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, and a low-probability high-base game state.

The board lamp 54 of the said 1st Embodiment corresponded to the "light-emitting part." However, it is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp 53 may correspond to the "light emitting section". Further, for example, the board lamp 54 and the frame lamp 53 may correspond to the "light emitting section". In addition, for example, lamps capable of emitting light other than the board lamp 54 and the frame lamp 53 may be provided, and the board lamp 54, the frame lamp 53, and the other lamps may correspond to the "light emitting section". Specifically, the other lamps may be button lamps provided for the effect buttons (the normal button 40 and the special button 41).

In the above-described first embodiment, the seventh right hammering table lamp 54k corresponds to the "first light emitting section".
However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect buttons (the normal button 40 and the special button 41) that can be operated by the player may be provided with a light-emitting portion. In this case, the light emitting section provided for the operable effect buttons (the normal button 40 and the special button 41) may correspond to the "first light emitting section". For example, even if the first left beating lamp 54a and the sixth right beating lamp 54j emit light starting from the light emission of the light emitting part provided for the operable production buttons (normal button 40, special button 41). good. Further, for example, the frame lamp 53 may correspond to the "first light emitting section". In this case, the first left hammering lamp 54a and the sixth right hammering lamp 54j may emit light starting from the light emission of the frame lamp 53.

In the first embodiment, the first left hammering lamp 54a corresponds to the "second light emitting part" and the "first light emitting part", and the sixth right hammering lamp 54j corresponds to the "third light emitting part", It corresponded to the "second light emitting section". However, it is not limited to this. For example, which one of the first left hammering lamp 54a, the second left hammering lamp 54b, the third left hammering lamp 54c, or the left and right hammering lamp 54d is the "second light emitting part", " It may correspond to the "first light emitting section". In addition, for example, the first right-handed ramp 54e, the second right-handed ramp 54f, the third right-tracked ramp 54g, the fourth right-tracked ramp 54h, the fifth right-tracked ramp 54i, or the sixth right-tracked ramp Of the lamps 54j, any one of the right-hand lathe lamps may correspond to the "third light emitting section" and the "second light emitting section". Also, for example, the effect buttons (the normal button 40 and the special button 41) that can be operated by the player may be provided with other lamps that can emit light. In this case, the other lamps provided for the operable production buttons (normal button 40, special button 41) correspond to the "second light emitting section" and "first light emitting section", and the frame lamp 53 corresponds to the "second light emitting section". 3 light emitting portion” and “second light emitting portion”. Further, for example, other lamps provided for the operable production buttons (normal button 40, special button 41) correspond to the "third light emitting section" and "second light emitting section", and the frame lamp 53 corresponds to the " It may correspond to "second light emitting section" and "first light emitting section".

In the above-described first embodiment, the seventh right-hand laundering lamp 54k corresponding to the "first light-emitting portion", the first left-hand laundering lamp 54a corresponding to the "second light-emitting section", and the "third light-emitting section" It was provided at a different position on the game board 1 from the corresponding sixth right hitting board ramp 54j. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the lamps corresponding to the "first light emitting unit", the lamp corresponding to the "second light emitting unit", and the lamp corresponding to the "third light emitting unit" may not all be provided on the game board 1. . Specifically, a lamp corresponding to the "first light emitting unit" is provided on the game board 1, and a lamp corresponding to the "second light emitting unit" is a production button (normal button 40, special button 41) that can be operated by the player. ), and a lamp corresponding to the “third light emitting portion” may be provided in the lower decorative body 36 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the lighting of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k is the starting point, the first left hammer lamp 54a is turned on, and finally the sixth right hammer lamp 54j is turned on. Starting from the lighting of the lamp lighting effect and the seventh right beating lamp 54k, the sixth right beating lamp 54j is turned on, and finally the first left beating lamp 54a is turned on. There was a performance. However, it is not limited to this. For example, starting from the lighting of the seventh right beating lamp 54k, it is possible to execute the third board lamp lighting effect in which the first left beating board lamp 54a and the sixth right beating board lamp 54j are lit together. Also good. In this case, 1st edition lamp lighting effect (for example, about 40% of expected jackpot) ⇒ 2nd edition lamp lighting effect (for example, about 60% of expected jackpot) ⇒ 3rd edition lamp lighting effect (for example, about 60% expected to hit jackpot) 80%) may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the order of the above. As a result, the turning on of the seventh right beating board lamp 54k is the starting point, and the order of turning on the first left beating board lamp 54a and the sixth right beating board lamp 54j allows the player to enjoy more visually. It is possible to entertain the board lamp lighting effect.

The 2nd edition lamp lighting effect of the first embodiment is an effect suggesting that the result of the look-ahead determination is more likely to result in a big win than the 1st edition lamp lighting effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the possibility that the result of the look-ahead determination suggested by the first edition lamp lighting effect will result in a big win and the possibility that the result of the look-ahead determination suggested by the second edition lamp lighting presentation will result in a big win may be the same. . Further, for example, the first edition lamp lighting effect may be an effect suggesting that the result of the look-ahead determination is more likely to result in a big win than the second edition lamp lighting effect.

In the first board lamp light emission effect and the second board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment, one board lamp 54 of the first left hammer lamp 54a or the sixth right hammer lamp 54j is lit first. , and the other board lamp 54 is turned on last. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the order of the board lamps 54 to be turned on is the same between the first board lamp lighting effect and the second board lamp lighting effect, but the light emission colors of the board lamps 54 in the first board lamp lighting effect and the second board lamp lighting effect are different. You can make it different. For example, in the first board lamp lighting effect, the first left hammering lamp 54a emits blue light, and finally the sixth right hammering lamp 54j emits blue light, while in the second board lamp lighting effect, The first left hammer lamp 54a may emit green light, and finally the sixth right hammer lamp 54j may emit green light.

In the first board lamp lighting effect of the first embodiment, first the first left hammering board lamp 54a emits light, then another board lamp 54 emits light, and finally the sixth right turning board lamp 54j emits light. was done. In the second board lamp lighting effect, first the sixth right beating board lamp 54j is illuminated, then the other board lamps 54 are illuminated, and finally the first left beating board lamp 54a is illuminated. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first board lamp lighting effect, if the first left beating board lamp 54a is first illuminated and then the sixth right beating board lamp 54j is illuminated, the order in which the other board lamps 54 are illuminated is the game. It may be changed appropriately as long as it does not interfere with the performance. Also, for example, in the second board lamp lighting effect, if the sixth right beating board lamp 54j is first illuminated, and then the first left beating board lamp 54a is illuminated, the order in which the other board lamps 54 are illuminated. may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The first board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment is centered on the display unit 50a, and in the clockwise direction, the seventh right hammer lamp 54k → the first left hammer lamp 54a and the second left hammer lamp 54b, a third left hammering ramp 54c, and a left and right hammering ramp 54d→three of a first right stamping ramp 54e, a second right stamping ramp 54f, and a third right stamping ramp 54g→ Light was emitted in the order of the fourth right hammer lamp 54h, the fifth right hammer lamp 54i, and the sixth right hammer lamp 54j. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the first left beating lamp 54a is emitted, the sixth right beating lamp 54j is emitted in order, and if the direction is different from that of the second beating lamp light emission effect, a direction other than the clockwise direction can be Specifically, for example, the first board lamp light emission effect is the order of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k → the first left hammer lamp 54a → the sixth right hammer lamp 54j, and finally the sixth right hammer lamp 54j is provided, and the 2nd board lamp light emission effect is 7th right beating board lamp 54k → 6th right beating board lamp 54j → 1st left beating board lamp 54a. It is also possible to produce an effect in which the lamps are turned on sequentially in the direction of the position where the first left hammer lamp 54a is finally provided.

In the first board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment, the light emission of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k is the starting point, the first left hammer lamp 54a is emitted, and the display unit 50a is the center. As the sixth right beating board lamp 54j emits light at this time, the light emission of the board lamp 54 progresses in the clockwise direction. However, in the 1st board lamp light emission effect, the light emission of the 7th right beating board lamp 54k is the starting point, the 1st left beating board lamp 54a is emitted, and finally the 6th right side lamp 54a is emitted. To make a player recognize that the light emission of the board lamp 54 progresses clockwise without the necessity of progressing the light emission of the board lamp 54 in the clockwise direction by the light emission of the striking board lamp 54j. is possible, centering on something other than the display part 50a, the light emission of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k becomes a starting point, the first left hammer lamp 54a emits light, and finally the sixth right hammer The light emission of the board lamp 54 may proceed in the clockwise direction by the board lamp 54j emitting light.

The 2nd board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment is centered on the display part 50a, and in the counterclockwise direction, the 7th right hammer lamp 54k → the 6th right hammer lamp 54j, and the 5th right hammer. A ramp 54i and a fourth right stamping ramp 54h → a third right stamping ramp 54g, a second right stamping ramp 54f, and a first right stamping ramp 54e → a left and right stamping ramp 54d. , a third left hammer lamp 54c, a second left hammer lamp 54b, and a first left hammer lamp 54a. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the sixth right beating lamp 54j is emitted, if the order in which the first left beating lamp 54a is emitted, and if the direction is different from that of the first beating lamp light emission effect, the direction other than the counterclockwise direction It may be a direction. Specifically, for example, the second board lamp light emission effect is the order of the seventh right beating board lamp 54k → the sixth right beating board lamp 54j → the first left beating board lamp 54a, and finally the first left beating board lamp 54a is provided, and the 1st board lamp light emission effect is 7th right beating board lamp 54k → 1st left beating board lamp 54a → 6th right beating board lamp 54j. It is also possible to produce an effect in which the lamps are turned on sequentially in the direction of the position where the sixth right hammering board lamp 54j is finally provided.

In the second board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment, the light emission of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k is the starting point, the sixth right hammer lamp 54j is emitted, and the display part 50a is the center. Since the first left hammering board lamp 54a emits light at this time, the light emission of the board lamp 54 progresses in the counterclockwise direction. However, in the second board lamp light emission effect, centering the display part 50a, the light emission of the seventh right beating board lamp 54k is the starting point, the sixth right beating board lamp 54j is emitted, and finally the first left When the striking board lamp 54a is illuminated, it is not necessary for the board lamp 54 to emit light in the counterclockwise direction, and the player recognizes that the board lamp 54 is proceeding in the counterclockwise direction. If it is possible to make it possible, the light emission of the seventh right hammer lamp 54k becomes the starting point, and the sixth right hammer lamp 54j emits light, and finally the first lamp Light emission from the left beating board lamp 54a may cause the board lamp 54 to emit light in the counterclockwise direction.

Further, in the first board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment, the effect using the light emission of the board lamp 54 was used. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the normal button 40 may be provided with a normal button lamp 40L. In this case, the first board lamp light emission effect is a light emission effect in which the seventh right hammer lamp 54k→normal button lamp 40L→frame lamp 53 is lit in order, and the second board lamp light emission effect is the seventh right hammer lamp. 54k→frame lamp 53 and normal button lamp 40L may be turned on in this order.

In the above-described first embodiment, the player who is viewing the display unit 50a is allowed to grasp which board lamp lighting effect is being executed, either the first board lamp lighting effect or the second board lamp lighting effect. A first left stamping ramp 54a, a sixth right stamping ramp 54j, and a seventh right stamping ramp 54k are provided around the display portion 50a so as to enable the above operation. If it is possible for the player who is visually recognizing the display unit 50a to grasp which of the first board lamp lighting effect and the second board lamp lighting effect is being executed, the 2, the first left stamping ramp 54a, the sixth right stamping ramp 54j, and the seventh right stamping ramp 54k may be provided.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 11, the first board lamp lighting effect and the second board lamp lighting effect may be executed. In this case, the first starting port 11 corresponded to the "entrance". However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the first board lamp lighting effect or the second board lamp lighting effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball to one of the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12. There may be In this case, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may correspond to the "entrance". Further, for example, based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12, there may be cases where the first board lamp lighting effect and the second board lamp lighting effect are executed. In this case, the second starting port 12 may correspond to the "entrance".

In the first embodiment, the special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, and the special figure lottery The fact that the result of is a jackpot corresponds to "the establishment of a specific condition", but it is not limited to this. For example, a special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12, and the result of the special figure lottery is a small hit. , or a jackpot may correspond to "fulfilling a specific condition". Further, for example, another starting port different from the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 is provided, and the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, or the other starting port A special lottery (special 1 lottery, special 2 lottery) is held with the winning of the game ball, and the fact that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot corresponds to "the establishment of a specific condition". can be It should be noted that the winning of a game ball to another starting port may trigger the lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (big hit lottery, ie acquisition and determination of big hit random numbers, etc.).

The jackpot game of the said 1st Embodiment corresponded to the "special game." However, it is not limited to this. For example, the small winning game and the big winning game may correspond to the "special game".

In the above-described first embodiment, the first left beating board lamp 54a corresponding to the "first light emitting part" and the sixth right beating board lamp 54j corresponding to the "second light emitting part" were placed in different positions. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the game board 1 may not be provided with all the lamps corresponding to the “first light emitting portion” and the lamps corresponding to the “second light emitting portion”. Specifically, a lamp corresponding to the "first light emitting unit" is provided on the game board 1, and the lamp corresponding to the "second light emitting unit" is a production button (normal button 40, It may be provided on the special button 41) or the lower decoration 36.

In the first board lamp lighting effect of the first embodiment, the first left beating board lamp 54a is illuminated, and finally the sixth right beating board lamp 54j is illuminated. Also, in the second board lamp lighting effect, the sixth right beating board lamp 54j was illuminated, and finally the first left beating board lamp 54a was illuminated. However, it is not limited to this. As long as the first board lamp lighting effect and the second board light emitting lamp lighting effect are light emitting effects, any light emitting effect may be used. For example, the first panel lamp emission and the second panel lamp emission effect may be different in emission color, emission pattern, etc., although the same lamp is emitted. Further, for example, the lamps to be emitted may be different between the first board lamp emission and the second board lamp emission effect. In this case, the board lamp 54 may be illuminated in the first board lamp lighting effect, and the frame lamp 53 may be illuminated in the second board lamp lighting effect.

The joint fighting reach of the first embodiment corresponds to the "special effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, and a frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 to emit light in a specific luminous mode, step-up notice, cut-in notice, notice using effect images, reach effects other than joint fight reach, etc., correspond to the "special effects" of the present invention. can be

The first board lamp light emission effect and the second board lamp light emission effect of the first embodiment are prefetch effects executed based on the start winning command. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the 1st edition lamp lighting production and the 2nd edition lamp lighting production are the results of the special figure lottery executed in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command (small hit, big hit) It may be a forewarning effect suggesting the possibility of being. In this case, the 2nd edition lamp lighting presentation and the 1st edition lamp lighting presentation suggest that the result of the special lottery is more likely to be a win (small win, big win). In addition, among the first board lamp light emitting effect and the second board lamp light emitting effect, one board lamp light emitting effect is a look-ahead effect, and the other board lamp light emitting effect is the result of a special drawing lottery (small hit, big hit). It may be a forewarning effect suggesting the possibility of being.

In the above-described first embodiment, the first board lamp light emission effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 11, and the special figure 1 relationship resulting from the execution of the executed first board lamp light emission effect The random number is cleared from the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and when it develops into a joint fight reach in the special figure fluctuation production based on the result of the determination of whether or not it becomes a jackpot in the special figure 1 determination process, Based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11, the second board lamp light emission effect is executed, and the special figure 1 related random number resulting from the execution of the executed second board lamp light emission effect is the special figure 1 reserved memory It is cleared from the part 105a, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where it is developed into a joint battle reach by the special figure fluctuation production based on the result of the judgment of whether or not it becomes a big hit in the special figure 1 determination process. there were. However, it is not limited to this. For example, as a notice effect that suggests the possibility that the result of the special figure lottery executed in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is a hit (small hit, big hit), the first board lamp A light emission effect or a second edition lamp light emission effect may be executable. In this case, based on the result of the special figure 1 lottery, the 1st board lamp emission effect is executed, and if it develops into a joint fight reach with the special figure fluctuation effect based on the result of the special figure 1 lottery, Based on the result of the special figure 1 lottery, the second edition lamp lighting effect is executed, and the special figure 1 is developed into a joint fight reach with the special figure fluctuation effect based on the result of the special figure 1 lottery. The lottery result may have a high possibility of winning (small win, big win).

The battle reach of the first embodiment corresponds to the "specific effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, and a frame lamp 53 and board lamp 54 to emit light in a specific light emission mode, step-up notice, cut-in notice, notice using effect images, reach effects other than battle reach, etc., correspond to the "specific effects" of the present invention. can be

The high probability high base gaming state of the first embodiment corresponds to the "advantageous gaming state". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the high probability high base game state and other game states may correspond to the "advantageous game state". Also, a high probability high base game state or another game state may correspond to the "advantageous game state". Here, the other game state may be either a low-probability high-base game state or a high-probability low-base game state. Further, the other game state may be a high-probability low-base game state and a low-probability high-base game state.

In the first board lamp light emitting effect and the second board lamp light emitting effect of the first embodiment, the first left hammer lamp 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, the third left hammer lamp 54c, and the left and right hammer A board lamp 54d, a first right-handling board lamp 54e, a second right-side boarding board lamp 54f, a third right-side boarding board lamp 54g, a fourth right-side boarding board lamp 54h, a fifth right-side boarding board lamp 54i, All of the sixth right hammer lamp 54j and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k emit blue light. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first board lamp light emission effect and the second board lamp light emission effect, if the light emission color of the first left hammer lamp 54a and the light emission color of the sixth right hammer lamp 54j are the same, other board lamps The emission colors of 54 may be different. Also, for example, a first left hammering lamp 54a, a second left hammering lamp 54b, a third left hammering lamp 54c, a left and right hammering lamp 54d, and a first right hammering lamp in the first board lamp light emission effect A ramp 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, a sixth right beating ramp 54j, and a third right beating ramp 54j. 7 All luminous colors of the right hammering lamp 54k, the first left hammering lamp 54a, the second left hammering lamp 54b, the third left hammering lamp 54c, the left and right hammering lamps in the second lamp lighting effect A ramp 54d, a first right beating ramp 54e, a second right beating ramp 54f, a third right beating ramp 54g, a fourth right beating ramp 54h, a fifth right beating ramp 54i, and a third The 6th right hammer lamp 54j and the 7th right hammer lamp 54k may all have different emission colors.

In the first embodiment, in the first board lamp light emission effect and the second board lamp light emission effect, the first left hammer lamp 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, the third left hammer lamp 54c, the left and right lamps A stamping ramp 54d, a first right stamping ramp 54e, a second right stamping ramp 54f, a third right stamping ramp 54g, a fourth right stamping ramp 54h, and a fifth right stamping ramp 54i. , the sixth right hammer lamp 54j and the seventh right hammer lamp 54k emit blue only. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first board lamp light emitting effect and the second board lamp light emitting effect, the first left hammer lamp 54a, the second left hammer lamp 54b, the third left hammer lamp 54c, and the left and right hammer lamps 54d , a first right-hand beating ramp 54e, a second right-hand beating ramp 54f, a third right-hand beating ramp 54g, a fourth right-hand beating ramp 54h, a fifth right-hand beating ramp 54i, and a sixth right-hand beating ramp. The board lamp 54j and the seventh right-hand beating board lamp 54k may have a first emission color (for example, blue) and a second emission color (for example, green) different from the first emission color. . In this case, it may be suggested that the second lighting color (green) has a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the first lighting color (blue).

The on-board movable body 55k of the first embodiment corresponds to the "movable body". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the under-board movable body 56k may correspond to the "movable body". Further, for example, the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k may correspond to the "movable body". In addition, for example, another movable body different from the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k may correspond to the "movable body".

The on-board movable body 55k of the first embodiment is positioned below the player from the initial position (see FIGS. 5A, 42A, and 50A) to the player (that is, the pachinko machine). below PY1). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the board movable body 55k may be movable from the initial position to the lower left for the player (that is, the lower left of the pachinko game machine PY1), and the board movable body 55k may move from the initial position to the pachinko machine. The on-board movable body 55k may be movable to the player's side.

Further, the under-board movable body 56k of the first embodiment can move upward from the initial position for the player (that is, above the pachinko gaming machine PY1). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the under-board movable body 56k may be movable from the initial position to the upper left for the player (that is, the upper left of the pachinko game machine PY1), and the under-board movable body 56k may move from the initial position to the game. The lower-board movable body 56k may be movable to the player's side.

In the first on-board movable body effect of the first embodiment, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), a temporary stop display is displayed on the display section 50a. The display positions of the displayed performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are changed downward for the player (that is, downward of the pachinko game machine PY1). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first on-board movable body effect, the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and the effect symbol EZ1 is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a. , EZ2 and EZ3 can be changed in any direction for the player. For example, in the first on-board movable body effect, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (i.e., below the pachinko game machine PY1), the effect symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a The display positions of EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 may be moved upward, leftward, rightward, or downward. Further, for example, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) in the first on-board movable body presentation, a temporary stop display is displayed on the display section 50a. The display position of the left effect symbol EZ1 is moved to the left side for the player (that is, the left side of the pachinko game machine PY1), and the display position of the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a is changed for the player. (i.e., below the pachinko gaming machine PY1), and the display position of the right performance symbol EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a is to the right of the player (i.e., the right side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1). ).

In the first board movable body effect and the second board movable body effect of the first embodiment, the display position of the effect symbol EZ of the board movable body 55k is below the player (that is, below the pachinko machine PY1). ). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first-board movable-body effect and the second-board movable-body effect, the movable-on-board body 55k moves the display position of the effect symbol EZ downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko machine PY1). However, there may be a case where the display position of the effect symbol EZ temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a is not changed.

In the second on-board movable body effect of the first embodiment, the on-board movable body 55k moves the display position of the effect symbol EZ downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1). The display position of the medium effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a was changed to the lower side for the player (that is, the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the second on-board movable body effect, the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and the middle effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a. As long as the display position of EZ2 is changed, it may be changed in any direction for the player. For example, in the second on-board movable body effect, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), a temporary stop display is displayed on the display unit 50a. The display position of the symbol EZ2 may be moved upward, leftward, rightward, or downward.

In the above-described first embodiment, there are the first-board movable-body presentation and the second-board movable-body presentation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, there may be a third-board movable-body presentation that is different from the first-board movable-body presentation and the second-board movable-body presentation.

In the first embodiment, in the first board movable body production, the board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and the display position is changed. (three), and the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) in the second on-board movable body production, and the display position is changed. The number of EZs (one) was different. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first board movable body effect and the second board movable body effect, the board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and the display unit 50a If the number of effect symbols EZ temporarily stopped and displayed differs, the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko machine PY1) within a range that does not interfere with the game. The number of effect symbols EZ whose display positions are changed can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) in the first on-board movable body presentation, and the display position is changed. The number of performance symbols EZ is a performance symbol in which the display position is changed by moving the on-board movable body 55k downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) in the first on-board movable body performance. If it is larger than the number of EZ, the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) within a range that does not interfere with the game, and the number of effect symbols EZ is appropriately set. Can be changed.

In the first on-board movable body presentation of the first embodiment, the on-board movable body 55k is moved step by step downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and is temporarily stopped on the display section 50a. The displayed performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can also be moved step by step downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first board movable body effect of the first embodiment, when the board movable body 55k is moved to the final stage, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a are displayed. A configuration in which the display position is changed may be used.

In the second on-board movable body presentation of the first embodiment, the on-board movable body 55k is moved stepwise downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and is temporarily stopped on the display section 50a. The middle effect symbol EZ2 being displayed could also be moved step by step downwards for the player (that is, downwards of the pachinko gaming machine PY1). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the second on-board movable body effect of the first embodiment, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved to the final stage, the display position of the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a is changed to The configuration may be changed.

In the first on-board movable body presentation of the first embodiment, the on-board movable body 55k is moved step by step downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), and is temporarily stopped on the display section 50a. The displayed performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can also be moved step by step downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first on-board movable body effect, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player from the first stage to the second stage (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1), the display unit The performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 temporarily stopped and displayed on 50a are also moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko machine PY1) from the first stage to the second stage, and are movable on the first board. When the on-board movable body 55k is moved downward for the player (that is, below the pachinko game machine PY1) in the final step in the body effect, the effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a is displayed. , EZ2 and EZ3 may be changed upward for the player (that is, above the pachinko gaming machine PY1). As a result, the player can be made to emphasize that the on-board movable body 55k has reached the final stage in the first on-board movable body presentation.

The joint fighting reach, the battle reach, and the effect shown in FIG. 54(D) in the first embodiment corresponded to the "suggestive effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the result of the jackpot determination is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, and a frame lamp 53 An effect such as lighting the board lamp 54 in a specific light emission mode, a step-up notice, a cut-in notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like may correspond to the "suggestion effect" of the present invention.

When the movement and temporary stop of the on-board movable body 55k are performed up to the third stage in the first on-board movable body production of the successful mode of the first embodiment, the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are temporarily stopped are displayed. reaches the display position shown in FIG. 46(A), and develops into SP reach, either joint fight reach or battle reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed reach the display position as shown in FIG. The movement and temporary stop of the on-board movable body 55k in the first on-board movable body presentation of the successful mode up to the above may be less than two steps, or may be four or more steps.

In the second on-board movable body production of the successful mode of the first embodiment, the movement and temporary stop of the on-board movable body 55k are performed up to the fourth stage, and the middle production symbol EZ2 displayed in the temporary stop state is shown in FIG. The display position shown in (A) is reached, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination suggesting a big win. However, it is not limited to this. For example, until the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is temporarily stopped and displayed, reaches the display position as shown in FIG. The movement and temporary stop of the on-board movable body 55k in the second on-board movable body presentation of the successful mode in 3 may be less than three steps, or may be five or more steps.

The design aspect showing the number of the upright performance symbol EZ in the first board on-board movable body presentation and the second board on-board movable body presentation of the first embodiment corresponds to the "first design mode", and the first board movable body presentation The symbol mode showing the number of the tilted effect symbol EZ in the body effect and the second board on-board movable body effect corresponded to the "second symbol mode". However, it is not limited to this. For example, any pattern mode may be used as long as the pattern mode of the directing symbol EZ in which the numbers stand upright in the first board movable body representation and the second board movable body representation are different.

The normal pattern aspect of the production pattern EZ in the first board on-board movable body production of the first embodiment and the normal pattern form of the production pattern EZ in the second board on-board movable body production corresponded to the "first pattern form". . However, it is not limited to this. The pattern mode of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 showing tilted numbers in the advanced challenge production is different from the pattern form of the middle production pattern EZ2 showing the tilted and reduced numbers in the on-board movable body challenge production. If so, any design mode may correspond to the "first design mode". For example, when the on-board movable body effect is executed, the normal pattern mode of the effect pattern EZ is changed to a pattern mode dedicated to the on-board movable body effect, and the symbol mode dedicated to the on-board movable body effect is changed to the "first It may correspond to "pattern mode".

When the on-board movable body 55k is moved in the first on-board movable body effect of the first embodiment, the effect symbol EZ is changed to a symbol mode showing a tilted number, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved in the second on-board movable body presentation, the on-board movable body 55k is changed to the presentation symbol EZ which is in a tilted state and shows a reduced number, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. . The pattern mode showing tilted numbers in the development challenge presentation and the pattern mode showing the tilted and reduced numbers in the on-board movable body challenge presentation corresponded to the "second pattern mode". However, it is not limited to this. If the normal pattern mode of the production pattern EZ in the movable body production on the first board and the normal pattern form of the production pattern EZ in the movable body production on the second board are different, what kind of pattern form is the "second pattern form"? ” may be equivalent to For example, the symbol mode showing reduced numbers in the advanced challenge effect and the symbol mode showing reduced numbers in the on-board movable body challenge effect may be the "second symbol mode". Further, for example, the symbol mode in which the number part is crushed in the advanced challenge effect and the symbol mode in which the number part is crushed in the on-board movable body challenge effect may correspond to the "second symbol mode".

Due to the movement of the on-board movable body 55k in the second on-board movable body presentation of the first embodiment, the intermediate production symbol EZ2 indicating the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed on the display section 50a is tilted. rice field. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the second board top movable body production, the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode (for example, "2"), and the middle production pattern EZ2 is a special pattern (for example, ☆). When the on-board movable body 55k is moved while the temporary stop is displayed in , the display position of the special pattern temporarily stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a is changed, and the special pattern is changed to a reduced pattern mode. It may be a variable configuration.

In the first on-board movable body effect of the first embodiment, the display positions and pattern modes of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are changed by the movement of the on-board movable body 55k. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first board movable body effect, the display position and pattern mode of two of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, or the right effect symbol EZ3 are changed by the movement of the on-board movable object 55k. The configuration may be changed.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the first left stamping ramp 54a and the sixth right stamping ramp 54j face each other around the seventh right stamping ramp 54k. Each was provided in flow path R1 and 2nd flow path R2. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first left stamping ramp 54a, the sixth right stamping ramp 54j, and the seventh right stamping ramp 54k may be arranged in a straight line.

When the on-board movable body 55k is moved in the on-board movable body production of the first embodiment, the display position of the production pattern EZ displayed on the display section 50a is changed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved in the on-board movable body effect, the display position of the effect symbol EZ displayed on the display unit 50a and the effect image (for example, background image, etc.) other than the effect symbol EZ are changed. The display position may also be changed. Further, for example, when the on-board movable body 55k is moved in the on-board movable body effect, the display position of the effect image (eg, background image, etc.) other than the effect symbol EZ displayed on the display unit 50a is changed. can be

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the first start port 11 (fixed start port) that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters, and the second start port 12 (variable Although the starting port and the starting port related to the electric tube 12D are provided, only one of them may be provided.

Also in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 determination process is performed preferentially over the special figure 1 determination process (variation display of special figure 2 is performed preferentially than the variation display of special figure 1) configuration and However, the special figure 1 determination process is performed preferentially over the special figure 2 determination process (the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed preferentially over the variation display of the special figure 2). In this case, the special figure 1 lottery should be a lottery that is more advantageous than the special figure 2 lottery and makes it easier to win a big hit.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, but it is also possible to apply it to other pinball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a mammoth ball game machine.

In the above-described first embodiment, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variablely displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variable display. Instead, it may be composed of patterns other than three, such as two. For example, you may provide two designs divided by special figure 1 and special figure 2. Moreover, one pattern common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be provided. In these cases, the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 may be used for display, and the sub-control board 120 may be used for control. Further, in areas other than the game area 6 of the game board 1, an LED device for displaying symbols may be provided. In this case, the main control board 100 or the sub-control board 120 may control the LED device.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the main control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 120 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). , the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed by different substrates, but they may be configured to be performed by one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

11. Inventions shown in the above embodiments In the above embodiments, the following inventions (inventions according to means A1 to A6, inventions according to means B1 to B5, inventions according to means C1 to C6) are shown . In the description of the invention described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
A special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is entered based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (there is a winning of a game ball into the first start port 11 or the second start port 12). A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether to control,
a light-emitting part (board lamp 54) capable of emitting light;
With production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The light-emitting portions include a first light-emitting portion (seventh right-hand beating lamp 54k), a second light-emitting portion (first left-hand side lamp 54a), and a third light-emitting portion (sixth right-hand side lamp 54j). there is
The first light emitting unit, the second light emitting unit, and the third light emitting unit are provided at different positions (see FIG. 2),
The production control means is
Starting from the light emission of the first light emitting unit, it is possible to execute a specific light emission effect (first lamp light emission effect, second lamp light emission effect) in which the second light emitting unit and the third light emitting unit emit light. year,
The specific light emitting effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the special game state,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the first light emitting unit, the second light emitting unit, and the third light emitting unit are provided at different positions, and the light emission of the first light emitting unit is the starting point, and the second light emitting unit and the third light-emitting portion are executed. Also, the specific light emission effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to a special game state. As a result, when the first light-emitting part emits light, the player can be made to pay attention to the first light-emitting part and also to the light emission of the second light-emitting part and the third light-emitting part. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the specific light emitting effect to be executed starting from the light emission of the first light emitting unit, and to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A2 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The specific light-emitting effect includes a first specific light-emitting effect (first board lamp light-emitting effect) and a second indicating that the possibility of being controlled to the special game state is higher than the first specific light-emitting effect. 2 There is a specific light-emitting effect (second board lamp light-emitting effect) (see FIGS. 36 and 37)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the second specific light emission suggesting that the first specific light emission effect is executed and the possibility of being controlled to the special game state is higher than the first specific light emission effect. In some cases, production is executed. Thereby, when the first light emitting part emits light, it is possible to make the second specific light emitting effect of the first specific light emitting effect or the second specific light emitting effect to give a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the specific light emitting effect, and to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine according to means A2,
The first specific light emitting effect is a effect in which the light emission of the first light emitting unit is the starting point, and the third light emitting unit emits light after the second light emitting unit emits light (see FIG. 40),
The second specific light emitting effect is a effect in which the light emission of the first light emitting unit is the starting point, and the second light emitting unit emits light after the third light emitting unit emits light (see FIG. 41).
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, in the first specific lighting effect, the light emission of the first light emitting section is the starting point, and after the second light emitting section emits light, the third light emitting section emits light. On the other hand, in the second specific light emission effect, the light emission of the first light emitting section is the starting point, and after the third light emitting section emits light, the second light emitting section emits light. As a result, attention is paid to which of the second light emitting unit and the third light emitting unit emits light first with the light emission of the first light emitting unit as a starting point by a specific light emitting effect. becomes possible. Therefore, depending on the order of the second light emitting unit and the third light emitting unit that emit light in a specific light emitting effect, it is possible to make the game visually pleasing and increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A4 is
In the gaming machine according to means A3,
In the first specific light emission effect, the light emission of the first light emitting unit is a starting point, the second light emitting unit is lighted, and then the third light emitting unit is lighted, so that the light emission of the light emitting unit is started. This is an effect that progresses clockwise (see Fig. 40).
In the first specific light emission effect, the light emission of the first light emitting unit is the starting point, and the second light emitting unit emits light after the third light emitting unit emits light, thereby causing the light emitting unit to emit light. It is a production that progresses in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 41),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the amusement machine having this configuration, the light emission of the first light emitting unit is the starting point, the second light emitting unit emits light, and then the third light emitting unit emits light. A first specific lighting effect to be progressed may be executed. On the other hand, the light emission of the first light emitting unit is the starting point, the third light emitting unit emits light, and then the second light emitting unit emits light, so that the light emission of the light emitting unit advances in the counterclockwise direction. There is a case where the light emission effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to easily visually grasp which specific light emission performance is being executed depending on which direction the light emission of the light emission part progresses in either the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
A display unit (image display device 50) capable of displaying the predetermined effect,
The first light emitting unit, the second light emitting unit, and the third light emitting unit are provided around the display unit,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the first light-emitting section, the second light-emitting section, and the third light-emitting section are provided around the predetermined display section. Starting with the light emission of the light emitting section, the light emitted from the second light emitting section and the third light emitting section can easily attract the player's interest, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The invention according to means A6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
Equipped with a ball entrance (first start opening 11) in the game area,
The production control means is
Based on the entrance of the game ball into the ball entrance, the specific light emission effect can be executed,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, a specific light emitting effect is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entrance, the specific light emitting effect It is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not it will be executed, but also to which specific lighting effect will be executed. As a result, when a game ball enters the ball entrance, the player is entertained by the light emitted from the first light emitting section, the second light emitting section, and the third light emitting section, thereby increasing the interest in the game. .

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is
A special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) is performed with the establishment of a specific condition (first start port 11 or the winning of a game ball to the second start port 12), and the special figure lottery result is a jackpot), a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game);
a light-emitting part (board lamp 54) capable of emitting light;
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a light emission production that causes the light emitting unit to emit light,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a special effect (co-op reach) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed,
The light emitting effect includes a first light emitting effect (first board lamp light emitting effect) and a second light effect suggesting that the special game is more likely to be executed than when the first light emitting effect is executed. There is a light-emitting effect (second edition lamp light-emitting effect),
The special game is more likely to be executed when the first light emitting effect is executed and the special effect is executed than when the second light emitting effect is executed and the special effect is executed. expensive,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the second light emission that suggests that the special game is more likely to be executed when the first light emission effect is executed and the special effect is executed than the first light emission effect is performed. A special game is more likely to be executed than when a special effect is executed after the effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to want the second light emission effect to be executed more than the case where the first light emission effect is executed. On the other hand, even if the first light emitting effect is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the special effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be entertained regardless of whether the first light emission effect or the second light emission effect is executed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

The invention according to means B2 is
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The light emitting portion includes a first light emitting portion (first left hammering lamp 54a) and a second light emitting portion (sixth right hammering lamp 54j) provided at a position different from the first light emitting portion. there is
The first light emitting effect is a effect in which the second light emitting unit emits light after the first light emitting unit emits light,
The second light emitting effect is a effect in which the first light emitting unit emits light after the second light emitting unit emits light.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, in the first light emission effect, the second light emitting section provided at a position different from the first light emitting section emits light after the first light emitting section emits light. On the other hand, in the second light emission effect, the first light emitting unit emits light after the second light emitting unit emits light. This makes it possible to make the user interested in which of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit emits light. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by entertaining the player depending on the order in which the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion emit light and whether or not the special effect is executed.

The invention according to means B3 is
In the gaming machine according to means B2,
A predetermined display unit (image display device 50) is provided,
The production control means is
making it possible to execute the special effect on the display unit,
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit are provided around the display unit,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, after the attention is paid to the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect in which the first light emitting portion and the second light emitting portion provided around the predetermined display portion emit light, It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed on the predetermined display section. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by allowing the player to enjoy the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section and the special effect without changing the player's viewpoint from the predetermined display section.

The invention according to means B4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (battle reach) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed,
The special effect is an effect that suggests that the special game is more likely to be executed than the specific effect,
The special game is more likely to be executed when the second light emitting effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first light emitting effect is executed and the specific effect is executed. expensive,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the special effect will be executed if the first light emitting effect is executed. On the other hand, if the second light emission effect is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the specific effect is executed, which suggests that the special game is less likely to be executed than the special effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the development of the performance after the execution of either the first light-emitting effect or the second light-emitting effect, thereby increasing the amusement of the game.

The invention according to means B5 is
In the gaming machine according to means B4,
The game control means is
After the end of the special game, controllable to an advantageous game state (high-probability high-base game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (low-probability low-base game state),
The specific effect is an effect that suggests that there is a higher possibility of being controlled to the advantageous game state after the special game than the special effect,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the second light emitting effect is executed, the possibility of executing the special game is lower than that of the special effect, but it is possible to be controlled to an advantageous game state after the special game is finished. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not a specific effect suggesting a high value is executed. As a result, when the second light emitting effect is executed, the player's feeling of wanting the specific effect to be executed is heightened, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
A special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is entered based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12). A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether to control,
Production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling a predetermined production,
a display unit (image display device 50) provided with a display screen;
a movable body (on-board movable body 55k) capable of moving on the front side of the display screen,
The production control means is
A movable body presentation (first 1st board upper movable body production, 2nd board upper movable body production) can be executed,
In the display unit, it is possible to display a plurality of performance symbols (effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3) through variable display and stop display,
When the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction in the movable body performance, the display position of the performance pattern displayed on the display unit can be changed.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the game machine having this configuration, when the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction from the predetermined standby position on the front side of the display screen in the movable body performance, the display position of the performance pattern displayed on the display unit is changed. be done. As a result, when the movable body moves from a predetermined standby position in a predetermined direction, the display position of the performance pattern that the player is paying attention to is changed, thereby providing visual entertainment using the movable body and the performance pattern. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

The invention according to means C2 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1,
The production control means is
When the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction in the movable body presentation, the display position of the performance pattern displayed on the display unit can be changed in the predetermined direction,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction from the predetermined standby position on the front side of the display screen in the movable body performance, the display position of the performance pattern displayed on the display unit is changed to the predetermined position. direction is changed. As a result, the user can grasp that the moving direction of the movable body and the direction in which the display position of the performance pattern is changed are related to each other. It is possible to increase amusement in the game.

The invention according to means C3 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1 or means C2,
The movable body production includes a first movable body production (first board movable body production) and a second movable body production (second board movable body production) different from the first movable body production,
The movable body is moved in the predetermined direction in the first movable body presentation, and the number (three) of the presentation symbols whose display positions are changed; Different from the number (one) of the production pattern that is moved in a predetermined direction and whose display position is changed,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the movable body is moved in a predetermined direction in the first movable body presentation, and the number of presentation symbols whose display position is changed, and the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction in the second movable body presentation. It is different from the number of production symbols that are moved to and the display position is changed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a surprise that the number of performance symbols whose display positions are changed varies depending on the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance. Therefore, by changing the display position of the performance pattern, the player can be more visually entertained, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means C4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The production control means is
By moving the movable body step by step in the predetermined direction in the movable body production, the display position of the production pattern displayed on the display unit is changed step by step.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the movable body is moved step by step from the predetermined standby position in the predetermined direction in the movable body presentation, the display position of the presentation pattern displayed on the display unit is changed step by step. Be changed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game by making the player interested in the movable bodies that are moved step by step in the movable body production and the display positions of the production patterns that are changed step by step.

The invention according to means C5 is
In the gaming machine according to means C4,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (battle reach, joint fight reach, effect shown in FIG. 54 (D)) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the special game state,
The movable body is moved to a predetermined stage in the movable body production (three stages in the first board movable body production, four stages in the second board movable body production), and the display is displayed on the display unit. When the display position of the production pattern is changed, the suggested production is executed,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the movable body is moved to a predetermined stage in the movable body performance and the display position of the performance symbol displayed on the display unit is changed, the special game state is entered. A suggestive production that suggests the possibility of As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable body is moved to a predetermined stage in the movable body performance and the display position of the performance symbol is changed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the amusement of the game by making the player more interested in the movement of the movable body and the change in the display position of the performance pattern through the suggestive performance.

The invention according to means C6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C5,
The design mode of the production design includes a first design mode (normal design mode in which the number part of the production design EZ is upright) and a second design mode different from the first design mode (the number part of the production design EZ is There is a tilted design mode),
The production control means is
When the movable body is moved in the predetermined direction in the movable body presentation, the pattern mode of the performance pattern displayed on the display unit can be changed from the first pattern mode to the second pattern mode. to be
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the movable body is moved from the predetermined waiting position in the predetermined direction in the movable body presentation, the display position of the presentation pattern displayed on the display unit is changed, and the presentation pattern is changed. is changed from the first design mode to the second design mode different from the first design mode. As a result, not only the display position of the performance pattern but also the pattern mode of the performance pattern are changed by the movement of the movable body, thereby visually pleasing the player who pays attention to the performance pattern and increasing the interest in the game. becomes possible.

12. Second Embodiment A pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 80. FIG. In the explanation of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, and the explanation thereof is omitted. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the second embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is equipped with a function of preventing over-prize balls while allowing the so-called normal base to be displayed on the 7-segment display 300 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment.

It should be noted that the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is a so-called V-Ken ST machine. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, if there is V passage (passing to the specific area 16) during the jackpot game, the probability variable flag and the time reduction flag are turned ON at the end of the jackpot game (high probability high base state) ), both the variable probability counter and the time-saving counter are set to a predetermined value (160), and if there is no V passage during the big win game, only the time-saving flag is turned ON (to the low probability high base state) at the end of the big win game. , the time-saving counter is set to a predetermined value (eg, 160).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, based on FIGS. 58 and 59, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, setting of a game state described later, a general figure lottery, a variable display of a general figure, an auxiliary A game control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls (progress of the game) related to game profits such as games, and a game effect (special figure fluctuation effect, holding effect, operation) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 Production control board (hereinafter referred to as "sub control board") 120 for controlling production such as production, jackpot game production, etc.) and customer waiting production, and payout control board 170 for controlling payout of game balls. It is provided on the back side of the image display device 50 of the board 1 . The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section (main control section) that controls the game. In addition, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section (sub-control section) that controls the effects together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the sound control circuit 161. In addition, the effect control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and various It is sufficient if the production can be controlled.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment has a power board 190. As shown in FIG. The power board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 119 that can be pressed. RAM clear switch 119 (specific operation means), when the power is turned on, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 described later (for example, game state information such as high probability state, the number of special figure pending and information such as the judgment result of the big hit) to the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 58, the RAM clear switch 119 is provided on a power board 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 119 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the amusement arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, the RAM clear switch 119 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. When the RAM clear switch 119 is pressed down, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 119 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101 . In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 119 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 119 can be changed as appropriate. can be

A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190 . The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment. do. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 is retained even when the pachinko game machine of this embodiment is powered off. A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . By turning ON/OFF the power switch 191, the power is turned on/off. A backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100 , or a backup power supply circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 may be provided on the sub control board 120 .

As shown in FIG. 58, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment according to a program. there is The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a game ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 contains a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a normal figure variation pattern determination table. , Auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The game RAM 104 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105, normal figure reservation storage unit 106, and the like. The game RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage unit 107, and the non-erasable storage unit 107 is provided with a total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, a total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and a difference number storage unit 107c. It is In the non-erasing storage unit 107, the game CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents even if the RAM clear is executed. The non-erasing storage unit 107 (total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, difference number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operating means) (see FIG. 60). As shown in FIG. 61, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and has a total of 32 lighting (light emitting) portions. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 has a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 are composed of eight lighting portions (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so as to represent numbers "0" to "9", respectively. It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as operating means when setting a set value corresponding to the probability of judging a big win. The inside of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated to the rotation position, and the power is turned on while pressing down the RAM clear switch 119, thereby setting a setting mode in which setting values can be set. can move to Then, in this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, only one type of set value "1" is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". When the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position while the setting mode is set, the setting mode is terminated and the RAM is cleared.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed. As shown in FIG. 60, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the game arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be detailed later. Also, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals.

Various sensors MS and actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100 . The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a general winning opening sensor 10a, a gate sensor 13a, a first big winning opening sensor 14a, a second It includes a big winning hole sensor 15a, a specific area sensor 16a, and a non-specific area sensor 17a.

The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a is provided for each general winning hole 10 . The gate sensor 13 a is provided at the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The first big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14 . The second big winning hole sensor 15 a detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 . The specific area sensor 16a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). The non-specific area sensor 17a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection.

Although not shown in FIG. 58, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor for detecting all game balls flowing down the game area 6 (total number of shot balls). Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the bottom of the game board mounting frame 2A. Therefore, the outlet sensor is provided in the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter game balls into various prize winning openings 10, 11, 12 and 14. FIG. Each of the sensors described above outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 when the game ball is detected.

The various sensors MS include a front door open sensor for detecting opening of the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor for detecting opening of the front frame 23m with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 . When the front frame sensor detects that the front frame 23m is open, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection. The types and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s, a first big winning solenoid 14s, a second big winning solenoid 15s and a distribution solenoid 16s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The first big winning opening solenoid 14s drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. The second big winning opening solenoid 15s drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D.

The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected to the display devices 8 (special figure display device 81, normal figure display device 82, and special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine of this embodiment and enables ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device. 73 are connected, and a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . The firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out the prize balls. , Paying out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73 a for counting the game balls, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73 a is output to the payout control board 170 .

The shooting device 72 is also provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with a handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72 k , the touch switch 72 a detects the player's contact with the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 . Further, the firing device 72 is connected with a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting solenoid 72s so that the game ball is shot with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, one game ball is shot every about 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Also, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160 . That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170 . The external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the game state, and information indicating an error or irregularity (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted by asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Also, the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, but the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

<Display on 7-segment display>
Next, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 61) in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be described. In the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio of the normal total prize balls won by the player in the normal game state and the normal shot balls fired by the player in the normal game state, is expressed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. In the 7-segment display 300, a base other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state and the number of time-saving balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, jackpot game The jackpot base, which is the ratio of the total number of jackpot prize balls won by the player in the jackpot state and the number of jackpot shot balls fired by the player in the jackpot gaming state, is not displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 always counts the number of normal shot balls, the total number of normal prize balls, and the total number of shot balls. The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability base state, etc.). The total number of shot balls is calculated by counting the detection of the outlet sensor by the game control microcomputer 101 . The normal number of shot balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the ejection port sensor only in the normal game state. The normal total number of prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The information on the number of normal shot balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normal winning balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 (FIG. 58) of the game RAM 104. reference) in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normal shot balls, the information on the total number of normal winning balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are maintained (not erased). Thus, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base by using the normal number of shot balls when the power is cut off and the normal total number of prize balls when the power is cut off. Then, the game control microcomputer 101, regardless of the game state (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.), the normal base value of the 7-segment display 300 It is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 61)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of shot balls every 60000 shots. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of balls shot reaches 60,000 is the first normal base. After that, when the total number of balls shot exceeds 60,001, the initial normal base value is stored as the previous normal base value. Then, the normal base calculated from 60,001 to 120,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 120,001, the normal base value of the previous round is stored as the normal base value of the previous two rounds, and the current normal base value is stored as the normal base of the previous round. be. Then, the normal base calculated from 120,001 to 180,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base.

After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 180,001, the value of the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base value 3 times before, and the value of the normal base value 1 time before is used as the normal base value 2 times before. stored, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. Then, the normal base calculated when the total number of shot balls increased from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 240,001, the value that was the normal base 3 times before is erased, the value that was the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base 3 times before, and the value that was the normal base 3 times before The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times ago, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time ago. Then, the normal base calculated from 240,001 to 300,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, similarly, the normal base is calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the values of the normal base up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the two previous normal base, and the three previous normal base at the maximum in the non-erasing storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104. I can let you. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101, on the 7-segment display 300, the current normal base ⇒ 1st previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 The display is switched every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 (see FIG. 61)), the right two digits (the third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340) the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated by the right two digits is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the current normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 displays "b1" in the left two digits and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base one time before.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b2" in the left two digits and the two previous normal base in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base two times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base two times before was started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits and the normal base three times before in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base three times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base three times before was started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "bL" in the two left digits and the current two digits in the right two digits, as described above. is displayed and so on.

Also, on the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of shot balls has been 300 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the right two digits. That is, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and when the total number of shot balls exceeds 300, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the value of the normal base denominator (the number of normal shot balls) is too small to avoid displaying the unreliable normal base value. there is Even if the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the number of normal shots has been 6000 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the left two digits indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3". ” flashes. After that, when the number of normal shot balls exceeds 6000 after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the left two digits are lit. In this way, when the person who confirms the normal base on the 7-segment display 300 is shown the blinking mode of the left two digits, the normal base value indicated by the right two digits has not yet sufficiently converged. It is possible to have the user grasp that the value is not a value. In other words, when the lighting mode is shown in the left two digits to a person who checks the normal base, the value of the normal base shown in the right two digits is a value that converges to some extent. It is possible to

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. FIG. After that, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting mode is terminated and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340 . Thus, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the display of the normal base is started. As described above, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the initial display is performed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all lighting portions LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 61) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, the 7-segment display 300 indicates "8.8.8.8.". In this way, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display immediately after the power is turned on, indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

<Over-prizing prevention function>
Next, the over-prize-ball prevention function in the pachinko game machine of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate the over-prize preventing function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prized ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unexecutable on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 (reference number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific count number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player acquires (pays out to the player) in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) is. The total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to put out to the player, but it means the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. can be The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states, as described above.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of prize balls is provided in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a (see FIG. 58). In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of shot balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the total number of shot balls counted is stored in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. is stored in the total shot ball number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 58). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on to calculate the difference number of balls, and the information of the calculated difference number of balls is It is stored in the difference number storage section 107c (see FIG. 58) provided in the non-erase storage section 107 of the RAM 104 for use.

Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the non-erasing storage unit 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the number of difference balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of shot balls at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 treats the number of difference balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of shot balls is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (the process of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 68), but also shoots a game ball. The firing control process (process of step S109 to be described later, see FIG. 68) is also stopped. Therefore, the player can immediately notice a situation in which the game cannot be played because the game ball is not shot even if the handle 72k is rotated. In addition, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control processing, and stops receiving signals corresponding to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and displays 8 and 7 segments. The display control of the indicator 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 .

After the over-prize preventing function is activated, the state in which the game cannot be played continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the over-prize prevention function is canceled on condition that the RAM is cleared. In other words, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the employee of the game parlor cuts off the power supply by turning off the power switch 191 . The employee of the game arcade presses the RAM clear switch 119 when turning on the power switch 191 to turn on the power. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by executing the RAM clear. Thus, in this embodiment, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game cannot be restarted only by turning the power OFF and ON (returning on), and the game can be restarted by executing the RAM clear. can.

Next, the timing at which the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. The over-prized ball prevention function is activated when the advantageous game state advantageous to the player is shifted to the normal game state on condition that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. In other words, at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80000, the over-prized ball prevention function does not necessarily operate. In this form, the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability base state after a big win game or a low-probability base state after a big win game.

For example, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 62(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Next, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 62(B). At this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of shifting from the big win game state to the high-probability/high-base state, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(C), when it comes to the timing of shifting from the high-probability-high base state to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. In this way, in this form, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the middle of the high-probability-high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing for the player to end the advantageous game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, information on the number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c of the non-erasing storage unit 107, and the number of difference number is not reset (cleared) by turning the power OFF and ON. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the number of difference balls is not reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, there are situations where the power is turned off and on (returned on) or the RAM is cleared due to bugs, failures, serious fraud, or the like, even during business hours. In such a situation, if the number of difference balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the provision of the over-prize preventing function would be meaningless. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or serious fraud occurs, the player who restarts the game after that may receive an unfair advantage that the over-prized balls prevention function will not operate easily. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from receiving the above-described unfair advantage, turning on the power again or clearing the RAM does not reset the difference ball number.

Next, the conditions for resetting the difference number will be described with reference to FIG. In this form, there are two reset conditions for resetting the number of difference balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed as shown in FIG. 63(A). That is, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the difference number information stored in the difference number storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. do. In addition, when the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the number of total prize balls and the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a The information on the total number of shot balls stored in the number-of-shot-balls storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter, this is simply referred to as "resetting (clearing) the number of difference balls". In addition, in FIG. 63(A), when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down in the customer waiting state, the number of difference balls is reset. However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference ball number is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 63(A). That is, if the game is not played for one hour after shifting to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 deletes the difference number information stored in the difference number storage section 107c of the non-delete storage section 107. clear. The customer waiting state is a game state in which the game is not executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B), it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the jackpot game state by a certain player's game. After that, when a certain player shifts from the jackpot game state to the normal game state through the high probability/high base state, the game is finished. In this case, if the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000), the over-prize prevention function can be activated for the player who starts the next game, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63(A), pressing the special reset switch 181 resets the difference ball number. As a result, the employee of the game hall can press the special reset switch 181 at an arbitrary timing after finishing the game of a certain player to reset the number of difference balls. Also, as shown in FIG. 63(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference number of balls is automatically reset. As a result, it is possible to reset the difference number of balls without imposing an operation burden for the reset on the employee of the game arcade. Thus, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the player who starts the next game from being extremely disadvantageous because the over-prize prevention function is activated immediately after starting the game. It is possible.

Next, an effect mode when the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. 64(A). When the over-prize preventing function operates, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a, and "Error X, over-prize error, please clear the RAM." is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, the effect mode shown in FIG. 64(A) makes it possible for the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be executed. It should be noted that the rendering mode shown in FIG. 64(A) continues until the power is cut off. The presentation mode shown in FIG. 64(A) is canceled when the RAM is cleared, but is continued only by turning on the power again.

Here, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the case when illegal magnetism is detected will be described. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal corresponding to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the shooting control process related to the game, in the same way as when activating the over-prize preventing function. In this way, the state in which the game cannot be played due to the magnetism detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again). can do.

Next, an effect mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 64(B). When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, as shown in FIG. 64(B), the display unit 50a displays a red background image RE and "Error 1: Abnormal magnetism detection. Turn on the power again. please” is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, when the performance mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (see FIG. 64 (A)) and the performance mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 64 (B)), the release method Other than the images, they are the same. Therefore, the employee or the player of the game hall is made to recognize that the game cannot be executed both when the illicit magnetism is detected and when the over-prize preventing function is activated. can be made easier.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 70000 will be described with reference to FIG. 65(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 63(A). First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110 are displayed on the display section 50a. Then, when the difference ball number reaches 70000, a purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and an overpayment indicating "abnormal overpayment with 10000 remaining shots" at the bottom of the display section 50a. A ball notice image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize notice image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation in which the over-prize prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple edge image EFa is continued even after the jackpot game state is over, but the display of the over-prize ball preview image KY is finished when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 80000 will be described with reference to FIG. 65(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 63(B). As shown in FIG. 65B, the display section 50a displays a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110. Then, when the number of difference balls reaches 80000, a red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating "stop the game at the end of the rush" at the bottom of the display section 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know when the game is about to stop and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb is continued even after the jackpot game state is ended, but the display of the game stop notice image KH is ended when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the game stop notice image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the number of difference balls reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 63(A), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 66(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This purple-rimmed image EFa allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000.

Also, after the number of difference balls reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 63(B), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 66(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a description will be given of an effect mode when the difference ball number is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. FIG. In this case, an employee of the game arcade opens the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22 and presses down the special reset switch 181 . Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and the error canceling method image ER2 indicating "Error 2, please close the front door" is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 67(A). is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to understand that the number of difference balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), an effect mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour will be described. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display section 50a. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible to let the employee of the game arcade know that the difference number of balls has been reset.

<Operation of the game control microcomputer in the second embodiment>
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 in the second embodiment will be described. Note that counters, timers, buffers, and the like appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 .

[Main Control Main Processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clear when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clear switch 119 is input. When the RAM clear is executed, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, information such as the number of special figure reservations and the result of judging whether a big hit is successful or not) is erased. Thereby, the game state is set to the normal game state (low probability low base state, low probability non-time saving state). However, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, The information on the difference number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] The main side timer interrupt processing (S005) in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned on when the over-prize preventing function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unexecutable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the processes of steps S102 to S113 are executed. That is, it is in a playable state.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001) of the main control main process (FIG. 23) of the second embodiment, the game stop flag is switched to OFF when the RAM clear is executed in the ON state. On the other hand, the game stop flag remains ON unless the RAM clear is executed while it is ON. That is, the state of the game stop flag does not change only by turning on the power again. In this way, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not the RAM clear is executed after the game stop flag is turned ON by the actuation of the over-prize preventing function.

If the game stop flag is OFF in step S101, an input process (S102), which will be described later, is executed. Then, after performing the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) for updating various random numbers, the sensor detection process (S104), and the normal operation process (S105) related to the operation of the electric chew 12D, the number of difference balls to be described later A measurement process (S106) and a special operation process (S107), which will be described later, are executed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a sorting device control process (S108) for controlling the sorting device 16D, and executes a shooting control process (S109) for controlling shooting of game balls. It should be noted that the sorting device 16D is operated when a special game using the second big winning device 15D is performed. Further, by executing the shooting control process (S109), the player can shoot the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the shooting control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be shot even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process (S110) for controlling the display of the 7-segment display device 300. FIG. Next, an error process (S111) is executed to determine an error (illegal) due to magnetic detection or an error due to the opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m. In the error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected incorrect magnetism. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error processing (S111), the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs output processing (S112), which will be described later, and executes other processing (S113). As other processing (S113), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. Further, as other processing (S113), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power interruption monitoring process (S114) when the power supply is cut off, and ends this process. In the power interruption monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply is cut off due to the drop in the monitoring voltage, the game information, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the number of difference balls. information, game stop flag information, etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 . After that, prohibition of access to the game RAM 104 is set.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 69, in the input processing (S102), first, it is determined whether or not the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether or not a signal based on the depression of the special reset switch 181 is received. (S201). If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erase clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erase clear process (S202), the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the number of difference balls The information on the difference number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erase clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erase storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of shot balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300 as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erase clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 67(A). In step S204, other processes are executed and the process ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101, for example, takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and stores it in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Sensor detection process] In the sensor detection process (S104), the general winning opening sensor process, the gate sensor process, the second starting opening sensor process, the first starting opening sensor process, the first big winning opening sensor process, and the second big winning opening sensor process. Sensor processing, specific area sensor processing, and outlet sensor processing are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

In the general winning opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a. Also, according to the result of the processing, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage part 106 provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random numbers are not stored. Also, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor 12a. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 2 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 2 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. In addition, when the Toku-zu 2 relation random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 2 relation random number is not stored. In addition, the second look-ahead determination is performed using the obtained Toku-zu 2 related random number and the second look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the second look-ahead determination Generate a command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting win command representing the result.

In the first starting opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 11a. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 1 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 1 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. It should be noted that, when the Toku-zu 1-related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 1-related random number is not stored. Moreover, the 1st look-ahead determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 relation random number and the 1st look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 1 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the first look-ahead determination Generate a command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting win command representing the result.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. Also, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. Also, a command for the second big winning opening sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Also, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the outlet sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the outlet sensor.

[Difference Number of Balls Counting Process] As shown in FIG. 70, in the difference number of balls measurement process (S106), first, the total number of prize balls count process for counting the total number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is executed (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a (see FIG. 58). Next, based on the detection by the discharge port sensor, the total number of shot balls is counted (S302). Information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the total shot number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 58). Then, the total number of shot balls is subtracted from the total number of prize balls, and the number of difference balls is calculated (S303). Information on the calculated number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 58).

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether or not the over-prize notice flag is OFF. The over-prize notice flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 70000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether or not the difference ball number is 70000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70000 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notice flag is turned ON (S306), and the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM104. As a result, when the over-prize ball notice command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize ball notice image KY are displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 65(A). .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. The over-prize flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 80000 or more (S309). If the number is less than 80000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S310). Then, the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S311), and this process is finished. As a result, when the over-prized ball notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 65(B).

[Special Action Processing] As shown in FIG. 71, in the special action processing (S107), the processing relating to the special figure display 81 and the big winning device (first big winning device 14D, second big winning device 15D) is divided into four stages. and assigns "special action status 1, 2, 3, 4" to each of those stages. Then, when the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 makes a special symbol standby including processing such as performing a jackpot determination and starting variable display of special symbols. Processing (S1302) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "2" (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special design fluctuation processing including processing such as stopping display of special design (S1304) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305), a special symbol determination process (S1306) including processing such as shifting the game state is performed, When the "special action status" is "4" (NO in all of S1301, S1303 and S1305), special electric accessary product processing (S1307) including processing such as opening the big winning opening is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special Symbol Standby Processing] As shown in FIG. 72, in the special symbol standby processing (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0". is determined (S1401). If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (S1401 YES), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the first start port 11 It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). And, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, the customer It is determined whether or not the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the customer is waiting. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process, which will be described later, is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO at S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this processing is finished.

In step S1401, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the storage of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 (special figure 2 reservation information ) is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b corresponds to the first reservation Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402). Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) is included.

Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information of special 2, If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the 1 start port 11 (reservation information of special figure 1), special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (S1408) and special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a corresponds to the fourth reservation The storage area to be read (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1412), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) includes the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408). Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including information on variation time) is included.

When proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process for clearing (resetting) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" is executed (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the game RAM 104 and is used to measure the duration of the customer waiting state. The value of the customer waiting counter is cleared when the power is turned on again regardless of whether or not the RAM clear is executed.

[Customer Waiting Measuring Process] As shown in FIG. 73, in the customer waiting measuring process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increasing process for increasing the value of the customer waiting counter is executed (S1420). As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state has continued for one hour or more. If it is determined not to continue (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to continue (YES in S1421), the non-erase clear process is executed (S1422), as in the process of step S202 described above (see FIG. 69). As a result, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c are stored. Information on the number of difference balls is cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1423), and this process ends. Thus, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a.

[Special symbol determination process] As shown in FIG. 74, in the special symbol determination process (S1306), first, the special symbol stop time (stop time determined according to the special symbol variation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If the time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process ends immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process, which will be described later, is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the release pattern (the set of data corresponding to the release pattern) may be performed for each round.

After step S1904, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game state reset processing (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to the normal probability state and non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special action status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Also, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the jackpot game is not started, so the special action status is set to "1" (S1909), and this processing ends.

[Playing State Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 75, in the playing state management processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is ON (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state is decreased by 1 (S2002), and whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" Determine (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (S2005 YES), the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" ( S2007). If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2008), and the process proceeds to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the difference ball number is 80000 or more. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010), and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability high base state or the low-probability low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S2011, the game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 64(A). Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished.

In step S2012, a game state specification command including information on the current game state (information on whether the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the variable probability counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing ends.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 76, in the output processing (S112), outer edge signal output processing, which will be described later, is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), commands set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in each processing described above are output to the sub-control board 120 or the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer End Signal Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 77, in the outer end signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether or not the over-price announcement flag is ON (S3101). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notice flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer end signal output process for overly awarded ball notice (S3102), the main control board 100 outputs an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer end signal for overly awarded ball notice"). , is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-notifying outer end signal to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game hall who is monitoring the hall computer is informed of a situation in which the over-prize prevention function can be activated when the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000) in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is possible to comprehend.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 80,000. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), an over-prize ball outer end signal output process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the over-prize ball outer end signal output process (S3104), an outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "over-prize ball outer end signal") indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 is paid out from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-ball announcement outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer is told that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment and that the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends. It is possible to make the player grasp the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is in an unexecutable state. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3105), the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES at S3105), an outer end signal output process for game stop is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output process (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function is mainly It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function. .

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the non-erase clear processing shown in step S203 or the non-erase clear processing shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information stored in the difference storage unit 107c It is determined whether or not the information on the difference number of balls has been cleared. If the non-erase clear process has not been executed (NO in S3107), the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if non-erase clear processing has been executed (YES in S3107), reset outer edge signal output processing is executed (S3108), and the process proceeds to step S3109. In the resetting outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal indicating that the difference number of balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer edge signal") is sent from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the resetting outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the number of difference balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. A dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an over-prize ball notice outer end signal, an over-prize ball outer end signal, and a game stop outer end signal , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 .

<Action and effect of the second embodiment>
As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, or in the middle of the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state, and there is no particular big disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment that does not award excessive prize balls while allowing the player to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop playing.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high base state (high probability base state, low probability height base state) ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the end of the high base state and before the number of balls in his possession decreases. In other words, after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of shot balls increases, and a situation can be assumed in which the difference number of balls becomes less than 80,000. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends so that the above situation does not occur.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, and the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more immediately after the player who plays later starts playing, it will be a terrible situation. situation. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the measured difference number of balls is reset based on the establishment of the reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour, the difference number of balls is reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the employee of the gaming hall presses the RAM clear switch 119 when the power is turned on, the gaming information (for example, information on the gaming state such as a high probability state, special figure pending information such as the number of wins and the judgment result of the jackpot) is erased, but the information of the number of difference balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. Therefore, even if the game information must be deleted due to a problem or the like during business hours, it is possible not to delete the calculated difference number of balls.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above, even if the RAM clear is executed, the measured difference ball number is not erased. However, when an employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181, the measured difference ball number can be deleted. In this way, the employee of the game hall can delete the measured number of difference balls at any timing.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
A modification of the second embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the second embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the second embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configuration included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above and the configuration included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above are the second embodiment and its It can be adopted for a game machine grasped from the modified example.

In the second embodiment, it is configured as a so-called V certain machine (a gaming machine controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol It may be configured as a game machine in which the transition to the high probability state is determined by In addition, in the second embodiment, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends according to the number of times the special symbol changes), but once it is controlled to the high probability state, the high probability state is reached until the next jackpot game starts. It may be configured as a game machine in which control to the probability state continues (so-called variable probability loop type machine) or a falling machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Further, it may be configured as a game machine in which a small winning game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds when a small winning is won in a lottery of special symbols. In this case, the gaming machine may be configured such that a big winning game (second type big winning game) is executed when a game ball entering the big winning opening by executing the small winning game passes through a specific area in the big winning opening. . A jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area in a big winning opening. It may be configured as a two-type jackpot game.

In the second embodiment, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and when transitioning from the high-probability base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state (see FIG. 62), or the low-probability base state (advantageous game state ) to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous game state shifts to the normal game state, but simply when the advantageous game state ends. For example, when moving from a high-probability base state (advantageous playing state) to a low-probability-high base state, or when shifting from a high-probability-high base state to a high-probability-low base state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. You can do it.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, it is assumed that there were 4 (predetermined number), which is the maximum number of special figures 2 reserved, when shifting from the high probability high base state to the normal game state. The lottery of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the lottery of the special figure 1, and is set more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1. - 特許庁In this case, when the high probability/high base state shifts to the normal game state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be executed four times, and it can be said that the player is still in an advantageous state. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous game state until all the special figure 2 reserves (special figure 2 remaining reserves) remaining when the game state is shifted to the normal game state are consumed. Then, when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested (when all the fluctuation display and stop display of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 remaining reservation are completed), the over prize ball prevention function operates (game may be disabled) (see FIG. 78). In addition, the special figure 1 lottery is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 lottery, and the order in which the game ball wins the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12 A lottery or a lottery of the special figure 2 may be executed.

In particular, it is a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, and when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2, a 2 type big win game is practically always executed (a game ball can pass through a specific area). 78, as shown in FIG. 78, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function operates when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested in the normal game state. Even if it shifts from a high base state (time saving state) to a normal game state, it is because 2 types of jackpot games are very easy to be performed until all special figure 2 remaining reservation is digested. That is, if the game becomes unexecutable due to the actuation of the over-prize preventing function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance of winning the second kind of jackpot game is lost, which makes it difficult for the player. It should be noted that the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending is not limited to four, for example, may be one, it can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, the timing at which the over-prize prevention function operates is when the high-probability-high base state ends or when the low-probability-high base state ends. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated only when the high-probability/high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends. Also, for example, when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or when the customer waiting state continues for a certain period of time, the over-prize preventing function may be activated. Further, for example, the number of extra balls may be 80000 or more, and the over-prize preventing function may be activated at the timing when the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, for example, at the timing when the difference number of balls becomes 80000 or more, the over-prized ball prevention function may be activated.

In the second embodiment, the first reset condition (see FIG. 63A) is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed down, or the second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the second reset condition (see FIG. 63(B)) is established, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends or when the number of difference balls becomes 80000 or more, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. When shifting from the guaranteed high base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, the number of difference balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends, so only when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 (reference number) during the rush state in one time , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, when shifting from an advantageous game state such as a jackpot game state or a high-probability-low base state to a normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. . Further, the difference number may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 119 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 .

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, if the specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the number of difference balls, it is possible to prevent the number of difference balls from reaching 80000 or more for a while. Note that the specific time described above is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. Further, for example, the difference ball number may be reset by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again).

Further, for example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the number of difference balls may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference number of balls without forcing the staff of the game hall to perform any operation. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 am, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operating means) for resetting the number of difference balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 60). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference ball number can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or may be arranged on a dedicated board.

In the second embodiment, the measured difference number of balls was not displayed by the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed by the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured difference ball number on the display device 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display device 300 (see FIG. 61). In this case, for example, when the number of difference balls is 0 to 50000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display device 8 or 7 segment display 300, and the number of difference balls is 50001 to 70000. If it is (second range), display the second mode on the display device 8 or 7-segment display 300, and if the number of difference balls is 70001 to 80000 (third range), display The third mode may be displayed on the device 8 or 7 segment display 300 . Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of difference balls (or information on the number of total winning balls, information on the total number of shot balls) to the sub-control board 120, and the microcomputer 121 for effect control performs image display. A display means such as the device 50 may display the number of difference balls. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the sub-control board 120 information on the number of awarded balls paid out (or the number of awarded balls to be paid out) and information on detection of the outlet sensor. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 may calculate the number of difference balls based on these pieces of information, and display the number of difference balls on display means such as the image display device 50 or the like.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the difference ball number on the 7-segment display 300 as in the modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, information on the number of difference balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections) and stored in four storage areas of the number of difference number storage section 107c of the non-erased storage section 107, respectively. . In the first storage area, the number of difference balls up to the present time since the power was turned on this time is stored. In the second storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) to when the power was cut off last time is stored. In the third storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times before) to when the power was cut off two times before is stored. In the 4th (N) storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two last times (3 times before) to when the power was cut off two times before last is stored. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the fourth storage area is erased. It should be noted that the information on the difference number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if the RAM clear is executed.

Then, in this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The number of difference balls stored in the th storage area is displayed in the right two digits (the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300 by switching in order in units of 1,000 balls. be. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "bL36" for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 80(A). This indicates that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base one time ago was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base 3 times ago is 38%.

Subsequently, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "cL20" for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 80(E). As a result, it is indicated that the difference number of balls from the time when the power is turned on to the present time is 20000. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the last time (one time before) when the power was turned on until the last time when the power was cut off is "0". When the number of difference balls is smaller than "0" because the total number of shot balls is larger than the total number of prize balls, "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time the power was turned on the second time (two times before) until the power was cut off the time before last is 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time when the power was turned on two times before last (three times before) to when the power was turned off two times before last is 48,000. After that, FIGS. 80(A) to (H) are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the modified example described above, each time the power is turned off and on (returned on), the measured number of difference balls is shifted and stored, and the number of difference balls stored in the 4th (N) storage area. is deleted. However, each time the RAM is cleared, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the 4th (N) storage area may be erased. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined specified time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured difference ball number is shifted and stored, and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference number of balls that has been played may be deleted. It should be noted that N described above can be appropriately changed as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 80, in the 7-segment display 300, the display of the difference number of balls is automatically switched every five seconds. However, the display of the difference number may be switched by operating a predetermined operation means such as pressing the RAM clear switch 119 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 . Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the number of difference balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operation means.

In the second embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000 (predetermined number), the performance mode shown in FIG. However, the effect mode indicating that the over-prized ball prevention function is approaching the operation is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 65(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 70000") or a special light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 and the frame lamp 53 are approaching the operation of the over-prize prevention function. may be shown. Further, as the number of difference balls increases, it may be indicated that the over-prize prevention function is approaching the operation by means of an effect mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the second embodiment, when the difference ball number reaches 80000 (reference number), the game can be stopped by the effect mode shown in FIG. 65(B). However, the presentation mode indicating the situation in which the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 65(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special voice from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 80,000") or a special light emitting mode of the board lamp 54, the frame lamp 53, or the like may be used to indicate a situation in which the game may be stopped. good.

In the second embodiment, when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated, the game is rendered unexecutable by the effect mode shown in FIG. 64(A). However, the effect mode indicating the state in which the game cannot be executed is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 64(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "game cannot be executed" may be displayed on the display unit 50a, or a special sound (for example, "game cannot be executed") may be output from the speaker 52. FIG.

In the second embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. However, even if the information on the number of difference balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erasing storage section) of the game RAM 104 and the information on the number of difference balls is cleared when the RAM is cleared. good. That is, the conditions for resetting the number of difference balls include the execution of RAM clearing, or the reset condition for resetting the number of difference balls is limited to the execution of RAM clearing. Also good.

In the second embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 68) but also shoots a game ball. The firing control process (the process of step S109, see FIG. 68) for causing it to be stopped was also stopped. However, when the over-prize prevention function operates, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the shooting control process. However, in this case, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotating operation to the handle 72k even if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible for the player to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Further, for example, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, the game ball may still flow down the game area 6 at the timing when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game ball may enter various prize-winning holes and give the player a prize. There is a problem that spheres can be given. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible to ensure that no prize balls are awarded to the player after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

In the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of shot balls based on the detection of the outlet sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a) that detect winning to various winning holes , the total number of shot balls may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end portion of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, based on the detection of this sensor, the total The number of shot balls may be counted.

In the second embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000, the over-price announcement image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(A). However, regardless of the number of difference balls, the game cannot be executed on the condition that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more in the customer waiting effect, the effect during the jackpot game (for example, the ending effect), the notice effect accompanying the variable effect, etc. A presentation explaining what will happen may be executed. This is because such an effect makes it possible to inform the players and employees of the game parlors in advance that the pachinko game machine has a function of preventing over-prized balls.

In the second embodiment, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are stored in the non-erase storage section 107 of the game RAM 104, so that even if the RAM is cleared, The information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are not deleted. However, by storing the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls in a non-volatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the game RAM 104, Even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls may not be erased.

In the second embodiment, the difference ball number is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the timing to start counting the number of difference balls may be from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal game state). In this case, the minus amount of the number of difference balls (that is, the total number of shot balls) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls separately, and subtracts the total number of shot balls from the total number of prize balls to calculate the number of difference balls. . However, the difference ball number may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the difference ball number. That is, every time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Also, each time a game ball is shot (every time the discharge port sensor detects it), the value of the difference ball counter is decremented. In this way, the number of difference balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. In this case, the value of the differential ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more so as not to become negative. Then, as described above, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the second embodiment, the over-prize preventing function is activated under the condition that the number of difference balls (specific count number) is 80000 (reference number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number), which is the reference for activating the over-prize prevention function, is not limited to 80000, and may be 50000, 100000, or 120000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the over-prize preventing function is the number of difference balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. However, the specific count number can be changed as appropriate if it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player from the viewpoint of not giving excessive prize balls. For example, the specific measurement number may be a game state such as a jackpot game state, or a difference ball count limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. Also, for example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive period. It can be. Also, for example, the specific count may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period of time such as a consecutive game period.

In the second embodiment, the pachinko game machine is configured as a non-enclosed pachinko machine in which the game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko gaming machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine that can circulate and enter the game area again after the game balls housed inside flow down the game area. In this case, a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170 is provided with a 7-segment display. Therefore, the 7-segment display may display the number of difference balls (specific count number). In addition, a 6-digit 7-segment display that displays the number of balls held is placed at the bottom of the front door. Therefore, the 6-digit 7-segment display may display the difference ball number (specific count number). It should be noted that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting.

<Invention shown in the second embodiment>
The above-described second embodiment and its modifications show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means X>
The invention according to means X1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000), and the advantageous gaming state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) that is advantageous to the player ends (see FIG. 62), the game is disabled (stops game control processing and launch control processing).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the advantageous game state, and it is not a particularly large disadvantage. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means X2 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) shifts to a normal game state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a timing when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention according to means X3 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
The specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the hit determination process that has been suspended by a predetermined number (for example, four) when the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state is completed in the normal game state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (see FIG. 62) when the game is executed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the hit determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number. In this case, it is regarded as a substantially advantageous game state until the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number is completed in the normal game state, and the game is stopped when the substantially advantageous game state ends. Is possible.

The invention according to means X4 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
Equipped with an entrance (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling a ball-entering easy state (high base state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering opening than in a normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball-entering state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the easy-to-enter state in which the game ball enters the ball-entering opening more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the easy-ball-entering state ends and before the number of balls in his possession decreases.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means X1 to X4 is capable of measuring a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player in the game machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. 2, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Y>
The invention according to means Y1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific count number becomes a predetermined reference number (80000) or more, the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) (see FIG. 62),
Based on the establishment of the reset conditions not triggered by power-on (the first reset condition that the special reset switch 181 is pressed and the second reset condition that the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specific measurement number measured This gaming machine is characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 63A and 63B).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing the game before the specific count reaches the reference number, and the player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific count becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the measured specific number of measurements is erased based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by power-on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

The invention according to means Y2 is
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 64(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, for example, after a certain player has finished playing, the employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, and the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The game control means can be controlled to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 63(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, assuming that the player has changed, the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is to shift from an advantageous game state (high odds/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal game state (see FIG. 63(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the advantageous game state that is advantageous for the player shifts to the normal game state, the measured specific counting number is erased. In this way, once the situation in which the advantageous game state continues is over, it is possible to prevent the specific count number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention according to means Y5 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that a specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state (see FIG. 63(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the specific time continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player does not last for a while. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific number of measurements from exceeding the reference number for a while by deleting the specific number of measurements.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Y1 to Y5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of specific measurements exceeding a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement measured based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. The difference is that the number is erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Z>
The invention according to means Z1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine of the second embodiment) comprising an operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 119),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
A game characterized by erasing game information related to the game (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but not erasing the specific measurement number that has been measured. machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when the employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, although the game information related to the game is erased, the measured specific measurement number is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the game state related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible not to erase the measured specific measurement number.

The invention according to means Z2 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1,
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that the measured specific count can be erased (see FIG. 63(A)) based on the operation of the special operation means.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the measured specific measurement number is erased by the employee of the gaming facility operating the special operation means. As a result, even if the game state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the game hall can erase the measured specific measurement number at an arbitrary timing.

The invention according to means Z3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 or means Z2,
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured specific count can be erased.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the measured specific count is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the measured specific number of measurements without having the employee of the game arcade perform any operation.

The invention according to means Z4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 to means Z4,
The game control means is
The specific number of measurements is stored in order by being classified for each predetermined period (period from power-on to power-off) from 1st to N (4)th,
Along with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is erased, and the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined period is erased. , and the measurement of the specific number of times in the first predetermined period is started.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to store the specific counts for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth. On top of that, as the number of specific measurements in the N-th predetermined period is erased, the number of specific measurements in the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is the number of specific measurements in the second to N-th predetermined periods Shifted as counts. Then, the measurement of the specific number of measurements for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the number of specific measurements for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth without having the staff of the game arcade operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Z1 to Z4 is capable of measuring a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. is erased, but the specific number of measurements that have been made is not erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

13. Third Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine of a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 89. FIG. In the description of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the same components as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is equipped with a function (referred to as an advantageous setting function) that allows the game parlor (hall) side to intentionally set a game state advantageous to the player. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the third embodiment.

The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery related to the second start port 12), a small win game for opening the second big winning port 15 is executed, and a small win When the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during the game (when there is a so-called V passage), a jackpot game including a round game for opening the first big winning hole 14 is executed a plurality of times. .

<Types of stop symbols>
First, the types of stop symbols in the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines the special symbol random number acquired based on the winning to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. It determines whether it is a big hit or not, and whether it is a small hit or not. As shown in FIG. 81 (A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the jackpot (so-called 1 type jackpot) is won with a predetermined probability, but the small You don't get elected. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the winning to the second starting port 12, the small hit is always won. That is, in the lottery of the special figure 2, the jackpot (so-called 1 type jackpot) is not elected, and there is no loss.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is won, the pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is determined according to the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. to decide. In the lottery of special figure 1, "special figure 1_jackpot design S" is determined at a rate of 50%, and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 does not include the jackpot (1 type jackpot). If the types of the winning jackpot symbols are different, the opening patterns of the jackpot openings in the first jackpot game and the settings regarding the game state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 82). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment determines the type of the small winning symbol by determining the symbol type random number according to the small winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. do. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" is determined, and at a rate of 20%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern t" is determined. If the type of the winning small winning pattern is different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game or the two-kind big winning game and the setting regarding the game state after the big winning game are different (see FIG. 82). This point will be described later.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment determines that neither the big win nor the small win has been won (that is, when it determines that it is lost), the symbol type random number is changed to the losing symbol type shown in FIG. 81 (D). By judging according to the judgment table, the type of the missing symbol is determined. In the lottery of special figure 1, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern S" is decided, at a rate of 10%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern T" is decided, at a rate of 10%, " Special Figure 1_Losing Design U” is determined. In addition, loss is not included in the result of the lottery of special figure 2. The difference in the types of the losing symbols affects the settings regarding the game state after the stopping symbols are displayed (see FIG. 83). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines the reach random number according to the reach determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to decide whether to The probability that it is determined that there is a reach differs depending on whether or not the gaming state is a normal time-saving state, which will be described later. When it is not in the normal working hours state, the probability of being determined to be reachable is higher than when it is in the normal working hours state.

Next, types of big wins, types of small wins, and types of losses will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. As described above, the results of the special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2) include "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". At the time of the "big win", the special figure display 81 stops displaying the "big win pattern". The jackpot patterns include "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T". Also, at the time of "small win", the "small win symbol" is stop-displayed on the special figure display 81. - 特許庁The small winning design includes "special figure 2_small winning design s" and "special figure 2_small winning design t". At the time of "missing", the special symbol display 81 stops displaying the "losing symbol". There are “special figure 1_losing pattern S”, “special figure 1_losing pattern T”, and “special figure 1_losing pattern U” as the losing pattern.

When a special symbol lottery wins a big win, a "big win game" is executed to open the first big win port 14 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed big win symbol. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed to open the second big winning hole 15 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small win symbols. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during execution of the small winning game, the first big winning hole 14 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning small winning pattern. A "jackpot game" to be opened is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the fact that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot winning is called a first-class jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passing through the specific area 16 is called a second-class jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), the opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends. (also referred to as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning hole between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

In addition, in this form, the small winning game is a small winning opening game that opens the second big winning opening 15, the opening (interval before opening) before the small winning opening game is started, and the small winning opening game is completed. Later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a type 1 jackpot is won), a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 14 is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 81a) that can be won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T".

As shown in FIG. 82, "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" are 4R (round) jackpots, and the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 per 1R is one. Yes, and its maximum open time is 29.5 seconds. The game state after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game state at the time of winning.

Here, the game state of this embodiment will be briefly described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment can be controlled to a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state in which settings related to the ease of entering the second start port 12 are different from the non-time-saving state. In the time-saving state, the normal time-saving state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second start port 12, and the slight time-saving state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second start port 12 than in the normal time-saving state (non- normal working hours). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 in the slightly reduced working hours state is not much different from the non-working reduced state. That is, in this form, the normal time-saving state is a high-base state in which a large number of balls can be expected to enter the second starting port 12, and the slight time-saving state and the non-time-saving state are unlikely to enter the second starting port 12. Low base state. Details of the game state will be described later.

The game state after the jackpot game when the ``jackpot pattern S'' is won is a non-time-saving state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state or a normal time-saving state, but the game state at the time of winning is a slight time-saving state. If so, it's a very short time. The number of times of time saving in the slightly time saving state is set to 800 times. Time saving number of times is the upper limit execution number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state. When the number of executions of the special figure variation in the minute time saving state reaches 800 times, the minute time saving state ends. In this case, it is set to a non-time saving state.

On the other hand, the time saving state after the jackpot game when winning the "jackpot pattern T" is a non-time saving state, regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state, a slight time saving state, or a normal time saving state. state.

Further, when a small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second big prize winning port 15 is opened once. When the game ball enters the second big winning port 15 opened by the small winning game, and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning device 15D, the big winning is won, and the first prize is won. A jackpot game (two types of jackpot game) for opening the big winning hole 14 is executed. When this jackpot game (jackpot game triggered by passing through the specific area 16) is executed, the opening of the second big prize opening 15 as a small jackpot game corresponds to the first R. In addition, if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed. A jackpot game or a small hit game may be called a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round.

In this form, as shown in FIG. 82, there are two types of small winning patterns that can be won in the special figure 2 lottery (small winning symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 81b). Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" and "special figure 2_small winning pattern t".

The “small winning symbol s” and the “small winning symbol t” are small winnings that can always pass through the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passing) as long as the game is played correctly. That is, in this form, the small hit election based on the lottery of the special figure 2 has substantially the same meaning as the big hit election.

In the small winning game based on the small winning symbols of each type, the second big winning opening 15 is opened once for 1.8 seconds. As long as the game is played correctly, it is possible to win a plurality of prizes while the second big prize opening 15 is open. It is controlled to the passage permitting state (the state shown in FIG. 3(B)).

In the jackpot game (two-type jackpot game) executed based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16, even in the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern s", the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" Also in the game, the first big winning port 14 is opened once per 1R from the 2nd R to the 10th R with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds.

The game state after the end of the two types of jackpot games based on the "small winning pattern s" is a non-short-time state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-short-time state or a short-time state, and a normal short-time state if it is a short-time state. state. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, the game state after the end of the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" is any of the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state at the time of winning. It is in a non-short-time state. It should be noted that the lottery of the special figure 2 in this form is mainly in the normal time saving state, and there is almost no lottery of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state.

Moreover, when it is determined that the game is lost as a result of the special symbol lottery, the type of the lost symbol is determined. As shown in FIG. 97, there are three types of loss patterns (loss patterns stopped and displayed on the special-figure 1 indicator 81a) determined by the lottery of the special-figure 1. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, it is determined to be one of "special figure 1_losing pattern S", "special figure 1_losing pattern T", and "special figure 1_losing pattern U". In addition, it will not be determined to be lost in the lottery of special figure 2.

"Special figure 1_loss pattern S" is a normal loss that does not affect the transition of the game state, but "special figure 1_loss pattern T" and "special figure 1_loss pattern U" serve as control triggers for the time saving state. It is a special loss (an example of a specific result). That is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special loss (also referred to as a time saving loss), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state after the stop display of the losing symbol to a time saving state. However, if it is already in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state or slight time-saving state) at the control timing to the time-saving state based on the special loss (that is, if the time-saving flag is ON), the setting of the game state is not changed. In other words, special losses are treated in the same way as normal losses.

More specifically, the game state after the stop display of the “losing pattern T” in the non-time saving state is the normal time saving state, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. In addition, the game state after the stop display of the “loss pattern U” in the non-time-saving state is a slightly time-saving state, and the number of times of time-saving is set to 800 times.

<Game state>
Here, the game state of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 84(A), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state) is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbols in the non time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined as winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to 65535/65536 in any of the game states of the non-time saving state, the normal time saving state, and the slight time saving state. In other words, in any game state, the normal symbol lottery is determined to be almost hit. In addition, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher than in the non-time saving state.

In addition, in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state, slight time-saving state), as shown in FIG. 84(B), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, 1 second in the normal time saving state, and 30 seconds in the slight time saving state. It should be noted that the normal symbol stop time is 0.5 seconds in any game state.

In addition, in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state), as shown in FIG. 84(C), the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game becomes longer than the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this form, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is 0.05 seconds per time in the non-time saving state, but it is 2.5 seconds in the normal time saving state and 0.1 seconds in the slight time saving state is.

In addition, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 84(C), the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game may be greater than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened is once in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state, but twice in the normal time saving state.

Here, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal pattern lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal pattern fluctuation time is as long as 60 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.05 seconds once. and very short time. Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, even if the game is played in the right-handed manner (the manner in which the game ball can pass through the gate 13), it is hardly expected to win the electric chew 12D.

On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it is almost a win, the normal symbol fluctuation time is as short as 1 second, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 2.5 seconds. Twice is long enough. Therefore, in the normal time-saving state, winning a prize to the electric chew 12D can occur frequently by playing the game with the right hand. That is, it can be said that the normal time saving state is a game state in which it is easier to win the electric chew 12D than in the non-time saving state.

On the other hand, in the slightly reduced time state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal symbol fluctuation time is as long as 30 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.1 seconds. One time is short. Therefore, in the micro time saving state, various parameters related to the ease of winning the electric chew 12D (the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern fluctuation time and stop time, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D) are in a non-time saving state In comparison, although the setting is such that it is easy to win the electric chew 12D, it is almost impossible to expect to win the electric chew 12D even if the game is played with the right hand.

In this way, in the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, it is not expected to win the electric chew 12D even if the player hits to the right, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the left. On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, hitting to the right often results in winning prizes in the electric chew 12D, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the right. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the present third embodiment, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game.

Like the normal time saving state, the slight time saving state can be said to be a game state in which it is easy to win the electric chew 12D compared to the non-working time saving state, but it is more difficult to win the electric chew 12D than the normal time saving state. It is the game state of the setting. In addition, the slightly reduced working hours state is a game state closer to a non-working reduced state than the normal reduced working hours state, since winning of the electric chew 12D cannot be expected. In addition, the normal time saving state is an example of the specific game state, and the non-time saving state and the minute time saving state are examples of the non-specific game state.

By the way, in the normal time-saving state, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired, is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the normal time saving state is also called "high base state", and the non-time saving state is also called "low base state". A short time state is also an example of a "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being performed. Therefore, the high base state is also called an electric support control state. The low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state.

The winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol fluctuation time and stop time, the opening time and number of openings of the electric chew 12D, etc. can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game performance.

<Special figure fluctuation pattern>
Next, determination of a special figure variation pattern (variation pattern of special symbols) will be described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines a special figure variation pattern according to a different special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state and the normal time saving state (see FIG. 85).

First, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state will be described based on FIG. 85(A). In the non-time-saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The lottery result of the special figure 1 has a big hit and a loss. In the case of a big hit, select either a special figure variation pattern P80 to perform SP reach or a special figure variation pattern P81 to perform normal reach without developing into SP reach. On the other hand, in the case of losing, if it is a losing pattern S that is usually losing or a losing pattern U that is a control trigger for a minute time saving state, when it is determined that there is a reach, a special figure variation pattern that performs SP reach Select either P82 or special figure variation pattern P83 that performs normal reach without developing into SP reach, and when it is determined that there is no reach, depending on the number of retained balls, special figure variation in which reach is not formed Select pattern P84 or P85. In addition, when the losing pattern U is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the slight time-saving state, but in this form, the slight time-saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player, so the losing pattern U is displayed in the non-time-saving state. When pulled, the same special figure variation pattern as when the losing pattern S is pulled is selected.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if the stop pattern is a loss pattern T that triggers the control of the normal time saving state, a special figure variation pattern P86 for performing a RUSH rush effect is selected. When the losing pattern T is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The RUSH rush production is a production that suggests shifting to a normal working hours state. The RUSH rush effect will be described later.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the minute time saving state will be described based on FIG. 85(B). The short time state is a game state that is least advantageous for the player in this form. That is, in the present embodiment, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state (normal game state). In the slightly reduced working hours state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. When the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, either the special figure variation pattern P90 which performs SP reach or the special figure variation pattern P91 which performs normal reach without developing into SP reach is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 is lost, no matter what the lost pattern is, when it is determined that there is a reach, the special figure fluctuation pattern P92 to perform SP reach, or to SP reach Select any of the special figure variation patterns P93 that perform normal reach without developing, and when it is determined that there is no reach, select the special figure variation pattern P94 or P95 in which reach is not formed according to the number of retained balls. . Since the game state is not newly set even if the special losing (losing pattern T, losing pattern U) is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, when the special losing is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, the normal losing (losing pattern S) is drawn. I am trying to select the same special figure variation pattern as when.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the normal time saving state will be described based on FIG. 85(C). The normal time saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player in this form. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times, a small win is always won in the lottery of the special figure 2, and V passage always occurs when a small win game is executed. Therefore, being controlled to the normal time-saving state means acquisition of the next big hit game (so-called Renso determination).

In the normal time-saving state, the game is played by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 85(C), when the special figure 2 lottery is made in the normal time saving state, the special figure variation pattern P100 with a variation time of 13 seconds is selected as the special figure 2 variation pattern. When this special figure variation pattern is selected, immediate hit production is executed. In the immediate hit performance, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (double number) indicating winning as soon as the ready-to-win is formed within the fluctuation time of 13 seconds.

<Processing of game control microcomputer>
Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, a game state management process shown in FIG. 86 is performed instead of the game state management process (see FIG. 75) described in the second embodiment. In addition, since the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is not set to the high probability state, it does not perform processing related to the probability variation flag indicating the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the gaming state management process (S1902) in the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is ON (S2101), and if not ON, the process proceeds to step S2110. , If it is ON, the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of times of special figure fluctuation (variation display of special symbols) executed during the time saving state is decremented by 1 (S2102), and the value of the time saving counter is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S2103). If not "0", the process proceeds to step S2110, and if "0", the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), the game state flag update process (S2105) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2110.

In the game state flag update process (S2105), the value of the game state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current game state. As shown in the table in FIG. 86, the value of the game state flag is set to "0" if it is a non-time saving state, if it is a normal time saving state it is set to "1", If it is a slight time saving state " 2”. In this game state flag update process (S2105), since the time saving flag has just been turned OFF, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "0" corresponding to the non-time saving state.

In step S2110, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is OFF. If the time saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S2130, but if the time saving flag is OFF, subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a special loss (S2111). Then, if it is not a special loss (loss pattern T or loss pattern U), the process proceeds to step S2130. See) is set in the time saving counter (S2113), the game state flag update process (S2114) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2130.

In this game state flag update process (S2114), if the time saving flag is turned ON based on the lost pattern T, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "1" corresponding to the normal time saving state, and the lost pattern U If the time saving flag is turned ON based on, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "2" corresponding to the slight time saving state. By setting the value of the game state flag to "1", the game state is controlled to the normal time-saving state, and by setting the value of the game state flag to "2", the game state is controlled to be the slight time-saving state. . It should be noted that each time-saving state in the present form, that the special figure fluctuation of the predetermined upper limit number of executions (time-saving number of times) is performed, or the next jackpot game is executed end by the establishment of either end condition .

In addition, in this form, it is limited to when it is a non-work-time-saving state (when it is YES at step S2110) to be controlled by the time-saving state based on special loss. That is, even if a special loss is pulled in the slight time saving state, a new time saving state is not set. Here, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state management process (S1902), the process (steps S2101 to S2105) relating to whether to terminate the time saving state is performed first, and then the processing relating to whether to control the time saving state based on the special loss. (Steps S2110 to S2114) are performed. Therefore, for example, in the variation of the special figure 1 to be the final variation of the minute time saving state, when the special losing is stopped and displayed, the process of steps S2101 to S2105 is shifted from the minute time saving state to the non-time saving state, steps S2110 to S2114 It will be transferred from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state by the processing of . In addition, the processing of steps S2110 to S2114 is configured to be performed prior to the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, so that even if a special loss is pulled in the final variation of the time saving state, it may be configured not to be controlled to a new time saving state. .

In step S2130, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state designation command including the information of the game state flag (that is, the information of the current game state) to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. FIG. By outputting this command, the sub-control board 120 is notified of the current game state information.

<Game flow in the third embodiment>
Next, the flow of game progress in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the game state that is not the most advantageous for the player among the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state, and the normal working time saving state cannot be shifted to the normal working time saving state even if the losing pattern U is drawn. It is in a short time state. The non-time-saving state is a game state more advantageous than the slight time-saving state in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern U. In addition, since the normal time-saving state is a gaming state in which the acquisition of a jackpot game based on the lottery of special figure 2 is substantially confirmed, it is the most It is an advantageous playing state.

In this form, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state. As shown in FIG. 87, when it is a slightly short time state, the production mode is set to the normal production mode (detailed later). In the short time state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The pachinko game machine of this form is configured so as not to directly shift from the minute time-saving state to the normal time-saving state. Therefore, when the player is in a slight time-saving state, the game proceeds with the aim of first shifting to a non-time-saving state. When the "big hit symbol S" is won in the short working time state, the game state after the big winning game is again set to the short working time state. On the other hand, when the "jackpot symbol T" is won, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the non-time-saving state. Also, when the number of executions of the special figure variation becomes 800 times (the number of times of time saving in the time saving state) without winning the jackpot in the time saving state, it is set to the non-time saving state.

The non-time-saving state is a game state that can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing a special loss, and is one of the game states that are advantageous for the player. When it is a non-time saving state, production mode is set to chance production mode (detailed later). In the non-time saving state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. In this form, you will win a special loss with a probability of 1/5 in the lottery of special figure 1. At this time, it is distributed to the losing pattern T (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 1/2, and it is distributed to the losing pattern U (the pattern that triggers the slight time saving state) with a probability of 1/2. When the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing pattern U, the game is played aiming at the shift to the non-time-saving state again in order to shift to the slight time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing design T, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The normal time saving state is a game state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially determined. When it is a normal time saving state, the production mode is set to the RUSH production mode (detailed later). In the normal time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. In the lottery of special figure 2, a small hit is always won. At this time, it is distributed to the small winning pattern s (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 4/5, and to the small winning pattern t (the pattern that triggers the non-time saving state) with a probability of 1/5. be done. When the winning small win in the normal time saving state is the small winning pattern s, the normal time saving state is set again after the two-kind big winning game based on the passage of V, so that the so-called big win consecutive game is decided.

On the other hand, when the small hit won in the normal time-saving state is the small-hit symbol t, the non-time-saving state is set after the two-kind jackpot game based on V passage. In this non-time-saving state, if the losing pattern T can be drawn, it can be returned to the normal time-saving state. On the other hand, when the losing pattern U is drawn, the game shifts to a slight time-saving state. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it is set to the non-time saving state once without directly shifting to the slight time saving state. Therefore, the player can expect to be set to the normal time-saving state again, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the non-time-saving state, when the jackpot is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1, even when the jackpot pattern S is drawn or when the jackpot pattern T is drawn, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is non-time-saving. state. As a result, the player is prevented from being discouraged by being set in a slight time-reduction state, which is more disadvantageous than the normal non-time-reduction state, even though the player has won a big win.

Here, the game state when the power is turned on will be described. When the power is turned on without the operation of the RAM clear switch 119, the game state when the power is turned on takes over the game state when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power supply is turned off in the short working hours state after closing the shop on the previous day, the game state when the power is turned on when the shop opens remains in the short working hours state. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 119, the flags and the like are initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 87, when the RAM is cleared in response to power-on, the gaming state becomes a non-time-saving state. As described above, the non-time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state in that a transition to the normal time-saving state based on the losing pattern T can be expected. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment can be set to an advantageous state for the player by the operation of an employee of the gaming hall (hall). That is, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with an advantageous setting function. As a result, in this embodiment, a player aiming at the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment in a state where no one has played a game since the RAM is cleared by an employee of the gaming hall, etc., can use the pachinko machine of this embodiment when the amusement hall opens. You can expect to play the game machine. That is, it can be expected to improve the operation of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment immediately after the opening of the game hall (so-called first thing in the morning).

<Production example in the third embodiment>
Next, an example of an effect in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. First, the presentation mode will be explained.

The effect modes of this embodiment include a "normal effect mode" in which a daytime background image is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 88(A), and a daytime background image as shown in FIG. is displayed on the upper and lower portions of the display unit 50a, and a background image of the universe is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 88(C). "RUSH production mode" displayed in is included.

The normal production mode (FIG. 88(A)) is a production mode that is set in the case of a minute time saving state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form is a game state advantageous for a player as mentioned above, this slight time-saving state substantially functions as a normal game state. The setting of the normal production mode (in other words, the display of the background image in the daytime) functions as a suggestion that the time is short.

The chance production mode (FIG. 88(B)) is a production mode that is set in the non-time saving state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form can shift to the normal time-saving state based on the lost pattern T, it is a chance for the player to shift to the normal time-saving state. The setting of the chance production mode (in other words, the display of the band image OG including the character of the chance) functions as a suggestion that it is in a non-time saving state. Moreover, since it sets to a non-time-saving state when RAM clear is made, the setting of chance production mode also functions as a suggestion that RAM clear was made.

RUSH production mode (FIG. 88(C)) is production mode that is set in the normal working hours state. When it is controlled to the normal time-saving state, the execution of the 2 types of jackpot games based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is confirmed, so the setting of the RUSH production mode (in other words, the display of the background image of the universe) is the normal time-saving state. In addition to functioning as a suggestion of the fact, it also functions as a suggestion of finalizing the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in the normal time-saving state, the game is progressed with the aim of winning a prize to the second start port 12 by hitting to the right. A right-handed shot image G108 informing that the player should hit is displayed in the upper right part of the display section 50a.

Next, the advance notice effect in the normal effect mode will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a dialogue announcement effect for displaying a predetermined character together with a dialogue when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. Dialogue The type of dialogue in the notice production includes dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high (such as "chance") and dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher (such as "hot heat"). , There is a line (specific line) that suggests that the pachinko machine of this form is equipped with an advantageous setting function. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment can execute the effect shown in FIG. 88(D) as the dialogue announcement effect of the specific dialogue. The production shown in FIG. 88(D) is a speech announcement production in which a mini-character with an apple motif says, "It might be easier to rush into RUSH first thing in the morning." Equipped with an advantageous setting function, in other words, it is possible to grasp that the first thing in the morning is set to a non-time-saving state by clearing the RAM, and that there is a possibility that it is easy to shift to the normal time-saving state. It should be noted that such a speech announcement effect for a specific speech functions as an explanation effect for explaining to the player that an advantageous setting function is installed. The explanation of the fact that the advantageous setting function is installed does not necessarily have to be performed as a speech announcement effect, and may be performed as an ending effect accompanying the ending of the jackpot game, or as a customer waiting effect. .

Next, the RUSH rush effect performed when shifting from the non-time saving state to the normal working time saving state will be described. When the winning design T is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure variation pattern P86 (see FIG. 85(A)). And the production control microcomputer 121, when the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is P86, performs the fluctuation production accompanied by the RUSH rush production. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the reach state as a RUSH rush production (FIGS. 89(A) and (B)), and then sets the medium production pattern EZ2 to the special pattern TZ. Stop display with a special eye. In this form, the special symbol TZ is an image containing characters (RUSH) of the name of the production mode (that is, RUSH production mode) corresponding to the destination game state (normal time saving state). In this case, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are stopped and displayed at specific stitches of "1, 3, 5". When the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with special eyes in this manner, it is suggested that the game is shifted to the normal time-saving state (RUSH performance mode). That is, the fact that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with a special eye is a production that suggests to the player that the shift to the normal time-saving state (pulling the losing pattern T) or a shift to the RUSH production mode. It functions as a production that suggests to do. The special stitches of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 and the specific stitches of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

<Effects of the third embodiment>
As described in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the RAM clear operation (ON operation of the power switch 191 while pressing the RAM clear switch 119) by an employee of the game hall, etc. It is possible to set the time-saving state, and the non-time-saving state is advantageous to the player in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern T. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible for an employee of the game arcade to set a game state that is advantageous to the player, and an improvement in service to the player can be expected.

Moreover, according to the pachinko game machine of 3rd Embodiment, RAM clear operation for setting to a non-time-saving state is operation possible only at the time of power-on. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the game state of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment to a non-time-saving state when the power is turned on to open the game arcade. Therefore, it is possible to guide a player who expects to play a game in a non-time-saving state to a gaming machine that has not been played by anyone since the opening of the amusement arcade.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when it is set to the non-time saving state, it is set to the chance production mode (FIG. 88 (B)), so that the RAM clear operation is performed by the employees of the game hall. It is possible for a player to judge whether or not the game machine is a game machine that has been used, and thus it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is possible to suggest, by means of a dialog announcement effect, that there is a possibility that a gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be set by the operation of the employee of the gaming parlor or the like. (See FIG. 88(D)). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the game machine is equipped with an advantageous setting function.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
A modification of the third embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the third embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Also, technical features in the third embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configuration included in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above and/or the configuration included in the second embodiment described above can be used in the third embodiment and its modifications within a range that does not interfere with the game. It can be adopted in a game machine grasped from the example.

In the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a short time state, the game state after the big win game is not set to the normal short time state, but the winning in the short time state is controlled to the normal short time state. You may provide the jackpot pattern used as an opportunity.

In the third embodiment, there is one type of lost pattern (loss pattern U) that triggers the transition to the short working hours state, and the number of times of short working hours in the short working hours state is set to 800 times. A plurality of types of unsuccessful patterns may be provided, and the number of times of time saving in the slight time saving state may be varied according to the types of unsuccessful patterns. For example, if the time saving state is set based on a certain lost pattern, the number of times of time saving is set to a small number such as 30 times, and if the time saving state is set based on another losing pattern, the time saving number of times is 900 times, etc. If the number of times is set to be large, it is possible to provide a slightly time-saving state that easily shifts to a non-time-saving state and a state that does not easily shift to the non-time-saving state, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

In the third embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it does not move directly to the short working time state, but is configured to be set to the non-short working time state once, but it is possible to directly move to the short working time state. There is a configuration (a configuration in which the game state after the jackpot game based on winning in the normal time-saving state is set to a short-time state, or a configuration in which the normal time-saving state is completed by digesting the number of time-saving states). good.

In the third embodiment, setting the chance production mode (displaying the band image OG containing the character of the chance) suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state, but suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state ( Suggestion that it is a game machine with RAM cleared) may be performed by other effects such as displaying a character image that is not displayed in a game state other than the non-time saving state. In this case, the production (suggestion production) that suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state does not have to be always performed if it is in a non-time-saving state, and is executed only when the production execution lottery is won It may be something that is done. In the third embodiment, the same daytime background image is displayed in both the non-working time saving state and the slightly working time saving state. When it is configured to do, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the non-time-saving state has been controlled to the slight time-saving state based on the losing pattern U, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Since the state in which the band image OG including the character of chance is not displayed in the chance effect mode is the same as the normal effect mode, it can be said that both are set to the same effect mode.

In the third embodiment, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state by turning on the power with RAM clear, when it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot game state (state in which the jackpot game is being executed) Also, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being consumed in a slight time-saving state, the same production mode (chance production mode) is set. It is set to the chance production mode only when it is controlled to the time saving state, and when it is controlled to the non-time saving state according to the end of the jackpot game state, or when the number of time saving times has been consumed in the slight time saving state Non-time saving When it is controlled to the state, it may be configured to be set to a production mode different from the chance production mode. Specifically, for example, if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, or if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being digested in a slight time-saving state, It is good also as a structure set to the same production mode as a time saving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the state after the RAM is cleared, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the third embodiment, the RAM clear operation using the RAM clear switch 119 was a state setting operation for setting the non-time saving state, but the state setting operation is an operation without using the RAM clear switch 119 (RAM clear operation). For example, it is good also as a structure set to a non-time-saving state by providing the exclusive switch for setting to a non-time-saving state, and pushing the said exclusive switch. In this case, the period during which the dedicated switch can be effectively operated may be a period other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be set to a non-time-saving state by pressing a dedicated switch during a customer waiting state (a state in which a customer waiting effect is being performed). It should be noted that the dedicated switch is preferably mounted on the main control board 100 or otherwise provided at a position where the player cannot arbitrarily operate it. That is, like the RAM clear switch 119, the dedicated switch is preferably provided at a position where it cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 2 is opened.

In addition, in the third embodiment, it is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine capable of executing a jackpot game based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15, but the so-called "ST machine" , or a "probability variable loop machine", it may be a game machine of a type other than a type 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In the case of a ST machine or a variable loop machine, it may be a so-called "symbol variable machine" that determines the transition to a high probability state with a high jackpot winning probability based on the type of special symbol that has been won, or a V attacker (specific area It may be a so-called “V probability changer” in which a transition to a high probability state is determined based on passage to a specific area in a large winning device having a . In addition, when configured as a "ST machine" or a "variable loop machine", it is configured to win a jackpot in both the special 1 lottery and the special 2 lottery, and the special 2 lottery is better than the special 1 lottery. A lottery may be advantageous in that a jackpot game with a large number of obtainable prize balls can be easily executed and the game state after the jackpot game is easily controlled to a high probability state. Also, even if a special loss is drawn in a high-probability state, the setting of the game state is not changed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the number of times of time saving in various time saving states can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above-described form, parameters in various time-saving states (normal pattern fluctuation time, stop time, electric chew opening pattern, etc.) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, the types and distribution ratios of each big winning symbol, each small winning symbol, and each losing symbol can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but depending on the game characteristics to be realized, it may be a so-called hanemono (2 type machine) without a 1 type jackpot. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 may be configured so that the so-called "direct hit jackpot" cannot be won.

In the third embodiment, the upper limit number of times of variable display of special symbols in the time saving state (time saving number of times) is counted even if the variable display of special figure 1 is performed or the variable display of special figure 2 is performed Although it was set as the total upper limit execution number, apart from this total upper limit execution number, special figure 1 upper limit execution number that counts only the variation display of special figure 1, special figure that only the variation display of special figure 2 is counted FIG. 2 may be configured so that an upper limit number of times of execution is provided, and the time saving state ends when any number of times is satisfied. In addition, special figure 1 upper limit execution frequency and special figure 2 upper limit execution frequency can be set to a value different from the total upper limit execution frequency. In addition, without providing the total upper limit number of executions, a special figure 1 upper limit number of executions and a special number 2 upper limit number of executions are provided, and when either number is satisfied, the time saving state ends, or special figure 2 Only an upper limit number of times of execution may be provided, and when this number of times is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated.

<Invention shown in the third embodiment>
Inventions of the following means are shown in the above-described third embodiment and its modifications. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means S>
The invention according to means S1 is
A prize winning opening (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12) into which game balls can enter,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for setting a game state based on the entry of a game ball into the winning hole;
With production control means (production control microcomputer 121) for setting the production mode for producing production,
The game state includes a first state (normal time-saving state) in which game balls are likely to enter the winning opening, and a second state (non-time-saving state) in which game balls are less likely to enter the winning opening than in the first state. state), and
The game control means may set the second state as the initial state,
When the second state is set as the initial state, the effect control means has a specific mode (chance effect mode) including a predetermined suggestive effect (for example, the display of the strip image OG shown in FIG. 88(B)) as the effect mode. ) is a gaming machine characterized by setting

The invention according to means S2 is
A game machine according to means S1,
In the game state, there is a third state (slight time reduction state) which is different from the second state and in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the winning hole than in the first state,
The game control means can make a special determination of whether or not to set the first state (determination of whether or not to shift to the normal time saving state based on the losing pattern T),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second state is more likely to be determined when the first state is set in the special determination than the third state.

The invention according to means S3 is
A gaming machine according to means S2,
The game control means changes the game state from the second state to the third state when a predetermined condition (stop display of the losing pattern U that triggers the transition to the short time state) is established in the second state. there is a
The game machine is characterized in that the effect control means continues the specific mode even if the game state changes from the second state to the third state in the specific mode.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2018-47326, after the jackpot game, it may be controlled to a time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting port. However, there is room for improvement with respect to the effects in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a time-saving state. By installing the improved production, it can be expected to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the invention according to means S provides a game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-47326 that "a game ball enters a winning hole more easily than in the first state in which the game ball enters the winning hole." There are times when the difficult second state is set as the initial state, and when the second state is set as the initial state, a specific mode including a predetermined suggestive performance is set as the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the enhancement of interest in the game through the performance.

11 First start port 12 Second start port 50 Image display device 50a Display unit 54 Board lamp 54a First left hammer lamp 54b Second left hammer lamp 54c Third left hammer lamp 54d Left and right beating table lamp 54e First right beating table lamp 54f Second right beating table lamp 54g Third right beating table lamp 54h Fourth right beating table lamp 54i Fifth right beating table lamp 54j Sixth right beating table lamp 54g Punching board lamp 54k... Seventh right hitting board lamp 55... On board movable device 55k... On board movable body 100... Main control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Sub control board 121... Performance control microcomputer PY1... Pachinko game machine

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of executing a special game based on the establishment of a specific condition;
a light-emitting part capable of emitting light;
A production control means capable of executing a light emission production that causes the light emitting unit to emit light,
The production control means is
making it possible to execute a special effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed;
The light emitting effect includes a first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect suggesting that the special game is more likely to be executed than the first light emitting effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images